JP6828573B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

In general, in gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, various characters appear on a display such as a liquid crystal display device as an effect for a variable game in a normal gaming state. In addition, as an effect during the jackpot game, there is one that displays a still image such as a character introduction image in addition to a moving image such as a PV (promotion video) of a character appearing in the effect in a variable game (see, for example, Patent Document 1). ).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-473392

By the way, as a game machine, it is important to raise the degree of attention to the jackpot game and the interest of the jackpot game to improve the player's motivation to play.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the attention to the jackpot game and the interest of the jackpot game to improve the player's motivation to play the game.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, the determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to the special game state (big hit game state) in which the special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed, and
A main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game based on the determination result of the determination means (41), and
The special game and the special game, including an image display means (341) for displaying a specific selection subject image (selected character image 714) for a specific selection subject (selected character) selected by a player from a plurality of selection subjects (characters). In the notification game (variable game) that notifies the determination result, the effect means (341, etc.) in which the game effect (big hit game effect, variable game effect) is executed, and
An effect executing means (51) for causing the effect means (341, etc.) to execute the game effect, and
With
The game effect is the specific selection subject image effect (specific character effect) executed by the image display means (341) with the specific selection subject as the main body, and the image display as the game effect executed in the special game. Including a visual impairment effect that hinders the visual recognition of the effect performed in the means (341).
The effect executing means (51) is characterized by having means for setting the specific selection subject image effect to be executed at a timing different from that of the visual impairment effect in the special game.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the attention to the jackpot game and the interest of the jackpot game to improve the player's willingness to play the jackpot game.

The perspective view which shows an example of the structure of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. The development view which shows an example of the structure of the game machine shown in FIG. The development view which shows an example of the structure of the game machine shown in FIG. The front view which shows an example of the game board when the movable accessory member of the game machine shown in FIG. 1 is in a standby position. The front view which shows an example of the game board when the movable accessory member is in an operating position. The block diagram which shows an example of the system configuration of the game machine shown in FIG. The block diagram which shows an example of the storage area of the main control device of the game machine shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main control unit. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt processing executed by the main control unit. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a start winning process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the 1st hold command setting process executed in the start winning process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main processing executed by the main control unit. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the variable game control processing executed in the main processing of FIG. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of data setting processing executed in the variable game control processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the variation start processing executed in the variation game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the time chart of the jackpot game executed by the game machine shown in FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the opening / closing execution mode control processing executed in the jackpot game control processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine shown in FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of an operation button operation detection process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of operation detection pattern determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the operation data table which shows the relationship between a detection pattern and an operation situation. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a game setting process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. The figure which shows the transition example of the display screen in the symbol display part in the game setting process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part in the game setting process of FIG. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a game start standby process executed in the game setting process of FIG. 23. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the top menu screen processing executed in the game setting processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game setting screen processing executed in the game setting processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the character selection screen processing executed in the game setting processing of FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table which is referred to when the variable command is received in the command determination process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table which is referred to when the variable command is received in the command determination process of FIG. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a jackpot game effect determination process executed in the command determination process of FIG. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example of an opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 5R referred to in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example of an opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 16R referred to in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 33. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the visual inhibition effect determination process executed in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 33. (A) shows a scenario of an opening / closing execution mode effect determined by the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 33, and an example of a round game for executing a visual inhibition effect, (B) shows an example of a round game effect screen. Figure. The figure which shows an example of the promotion effect which is executed as the visual inhibition effect in a jackpot game effect. The figure which shows an example of the hold consecutive villa confirmation production which is executed as the visual inhibition effect in a jackpot game production. The figure which shows an example of the specific number payout display effect which is executed as the visual inhibition effect in a jackpot game effect. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of an error processing procedure executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of an error processing procedure executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. The figure which shows an example of an error display executed as a visual inhibition effect in a jackpot game effect. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot game effect processing executed by the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a ball ejection display effect process executed in the jackpot game process of FIG. 44. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a round game effect process executed in the jackpot game process of FIG. 44. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 5R which is referred to in the jackpot game effect determination process executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of an opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 16R referred to in the jackpot game effect determination process executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a visual impairment effect determination process executed by a voice lamp control device of a game machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the error processing procedure executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the error display in the symbol display part in the error processing of FIG. The figure which shows other example of the error display in the symbol display part in the error processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the error processing procedure executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot game character effect data table referred to in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 55. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of an opening / closing execution mode effect determination table referred to in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 55. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot game character effect data table referred to in the jackpot game effect determination process executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the jackpot game character effect data table referred to in the jackpot game effect determination process executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the payout display effect processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on 9th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of an opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 5R referred to in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 61. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of an opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 16R referred to in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 61.

Hereinafter, the first to sixth embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings, and the present invention will be understood. Further, each of the following embodiments is an example embodying the present invention, and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 46.

[Outline configuration of game machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the game machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are development views of the game machine 10, and FIGS. 4 and 5 are front views of the game board 31 of the game machine 10. Hereinafter, the front-back, left-right, and up-down expressions used in the present embodiment are defined by the front-back direction D1, the up-down direction D2, and the left-right direction D3 shown in FIGS. 1 to 3.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine including a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is provided on an island facility (not shown) in a gaming hall. By fixing the outer frame 14, it is installed in the game hall. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine, but other gaming machines such as a rotating body type gaming machine (slot machine), an arrange ball gaming machine, and a Jiyan ball gaming machine will be described. The present invention can also be applied to a game machine.

[Structure of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the outer frame 14. Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the inner frame 12.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a selection determination unit 21, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination unit 27, and the like.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 6) that switches an input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 described later according to the presence or absence of a pressing operation. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of the operation button 20. The operation button 20 is a promotion effect (FIG. 38) as a visual inhibition effect, which will be described later, such as an operation button effect executed when the player operates the operation button 20 in a predetermined specific period in the variable game effect. (See) is operated to execute. Further, the operation button 20 is operated to shift the display screen on the symbol display unit 341, which will be described later, from the variable stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25 (A)) to the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25 (B)). To.

The installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper plate 23, and may be any position of the front frame 11 as long as it can be operated by the player. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Further, the operation switch 20a is not limited to the contact type switch, and may be, for example, a piezoelectric element or the like, as long as it can be used to detect the presence or absence of operation by the player.

Further, instead of the operation button 20, it is conceivable to provide a touch panel that displays a touch key and accepts an operation by the player of the touch key. Further, instead of the operation button 20, it is conceivable that the panel 25 and a touch sensor for detecting the player's touch operation on the panel 25 are provided. Further, the operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or the panel 25 in the variable game effect is reflected in the operation button effect and the like.

The selection determination unit 21 is operated by the player, and is a push button that accepts the player's pressing operation in the game setting process (see FIG. 23) described later. The selection determination unit 21 includes a plurality of selection buttons 21A and a determination button 21B.

The plurality of selection buttons 21A are operated by the player in order to temporarily select a desired item from the options (items) such as the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B) in the game setting process. It includes an upper selection button 211, a lower selection button 212, a left selection button 213 and a right selection button 214. Each of these selection buttons 211 to 214 has an upper selection operation switch 211a, a lower selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, and a right selection operation switch 211d (FIG. 6) for switching an input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 described later. See). As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of each of the selection buttons 211 to 214.

On the other hand, the decision button 21B is operated by the player to determine the tentatively selected item. Further, the decision button 21B includes a decision operation switch 21Ba for switching an input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 described later. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of the decision button 21B.

Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (121 to 214) and the decision button 21B, it is conceivable that a touch panel that displays a touch key and accepts an operation by the player of the touch key is provided as an operation means. Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (121 to 214) and the decision button 21B, it is conceivable that a touch sensor for detecting the player's touch operation on the panel 25 and the panel 25 is provided as an operation means. It is also conceivable to provide a jog dial instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211-214).

The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to launch the game ball. In the game machine 10, a basic game is performed by firing a game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 32, which will be described later, with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the game machine 10, when the launch handle 22 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

The upper plate 23 is arranged below the panel 25, stores the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 of the payout mechanism 130 described later, and arranges the stored game balls in a row. It is used to guide the game ball launch mechanism 32. Further, the lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23, and is used for storing the game balls surplus in the upper plate 23.

The panel 25 is colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the game machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end portion of the front frame 11, and include variable game effect processing (step S1911 in FIG. 19), jackpot game effect process (see step S1912 in FIG. 19, and FIG. 44). In addition to executing the sound production that outputs the sound in, the sound output that notifies that an error has occurred when an error occurs is performed. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. Further, the illumination unit 27 has a built-in light source such as an indicator lamp and an LED, and executes a lamp effect depending on a lighting mode such as lighting or blinking.

[Structure of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launch mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. In FIG. 2, the description on the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for the sake of simplification of the illustration.

The control unit 33 has a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the game machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing the control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to one direction of the sub control unit 332. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the game board 31 has an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first operating port 314, a second operating port 315, a variable winning port 316, and a through gate 317. An out port 318, a variable display unit 34, a magnet sensor 35, a radio wave sensor 36, a main display unit 37, and a movable accessory member 39 are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the game area on the board surface of the game board 31. Then, after being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game ball that did not enter the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, or the variable winning opening 316 is discharged from the out opening 318. Will be done.

Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a launching rail 321 and a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323. The launch rail 321 is formed from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 is formed on the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is a guide. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 one by one onto the launch rail 321. The solenoid 323 is a driving means for launching the game ball supplied on the launch rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. Then, in the game machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to the operation of the launch handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 to the game board 31. The game ball launching mechanism 32 may be a mechanism for launching the game ball by using another driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

Returning to the description of FIGS. 4 and 5, the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening 318 have openings that penetrate the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. Is formed. Then, on the back side of the game board 31, the entry of the game ball can be individually detected corresponding to each of the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316. Ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, 316a (see FIG. 6) are provided. Further, the through gate 317 is a gate through which the game ball can pass, and has a ball entry sensor 317a (see FIG. 6) capable of individually detecting the game ball passing through the through gate 317. In the game board 31, the game ball may pass through the through gate 317 when the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes on the right side of the game board 31, that is, when the ball is hitting to the right.

The ball entry sensors 313a to 317a (see FIG. 6) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a are input to the main control unit 331. Hereinafter, the detection of the entry of a game ball by the entry sensors 313a to 317a may be referred to as winning. The ball entry sensors 313a to 317a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but may be any sensor capable of individually detecting the entry of a game ball by another detection method.

Further, the second operating port 315 is provided with an electric accessory 315b for switching whether or not there is a restriction on the entry of the game ball into the second operating port 315. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, the opening of the electric accessory 315b enables the game ball to enter the second operating port 315, and the closing of the electric accessory 315b allows the game ball to enter the second operating port 315. The sphere is restricted.

Further, the variable winning opening 316 is provided with an opening / closing door 316b for switching whether or not there is a restriction on the entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening 316. The opening / closing door 316b is opened / closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, the opening / closing door 316b allows the game ball to enter the variable winning opening 316, and the opening / closing door 316b closes to limit the entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening 316. The door.

In the game machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315 is detected by the entry sensor 314a or the entry sensor 315a, the main control unit 331 performs a big hit lottery. Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display unit 37 according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery. Further, the lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub control unit 332, and the sub control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 and the like according to the lottery result.

Further, in the game machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316 is detected by the entry sensors 313a to 316a, A preset number of prize balls will be paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general winning opening 313 is 10, the number of winning balls when entering the first operating port 314 or the second operating opening 315 is 3, and the number of winning balls is entered into the variable winning opening 316. If so, the number of prize balls is 13. In particular, in the game machine 10, when the lottery result performed by the main control unit 331 is a big hit, the game shifts to the big hit game state (special game state), and the variable winning opening 316 is opened, which will be described later in the round game (unit game). ) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times and 16 times), so that a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315, a big hit lottery is executed. Then, when the lottery result is won, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and a 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state) and a 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state. In the 5R jackpot game state, the variable winning opening 316 is opened until a predetermined time elapses, or until a predetermined number or more of game balls are won in the variable winning opening 316, and a round game (unit game) is performed five times. It is a gaming state including a mode. The 16R probability variation jackpot game state is a game state including an open / close execution mode in which a round game (unit game) is performed 16 times, and a larger amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out than in the 5R jackpot game state, and more than in the 5R jackpot game state. It is an advantageous gaming state for the player.

The variable display unit 34 has a symbol display unit 341 such as a liquid crystal display that is visibly arranged through an opening 31A formed in a substantially central portion of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the symbol variation display and the variable game according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to the ball entering the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315. Various displays such as an effect display are performed. The symbol display unit 341 is an example of the image display means of the present invention, and constitutes the effect means of the present invention. Further, the symbol display unit 341 may be a dot matrix, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display. Further, it is conceivable to provide one or a plurality of sub-display units separately from the symbol display unit 341. The sub display unit is arranged, for example, at the upper or lower portion of the symbol display unit 341, or at the left or right portion. The sub-display unit may be movable between a position that covers the symbol display unit 341 and a position that does not cover the symbol display unit 341. Further, the sub display unit may be arranged on the upper plate 23. The sub-display unit may constitute the image display means of the present invention alone or together with the design display unit 341.

For example, the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is performed by, for example, scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" in order in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the diagonal direction, and the like. In addition, sub-designs such as other characters or symbols may be displayed between the main symbols. Further, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that there are no sub-symbols and there are nine types of main symbols "1" to "9".

In the game machine 10, in the variable game, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the main symbols stops after the lapse of the preset variation display time from the start of the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341. .. More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all the main symbols fluctuate along the preset fluctuation directions (for example, the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, etc.), and the fluctuations of the plurality of main symbols are stopped in order. Then, when the fluctuation of the main symbol in all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time elapses, the symbol variation display ends.

When the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is completed, the symbol display unit 341 displays a state in which the main symbols are lined up on one or a plurality of effective lines. At this time, the stopped state of the main symbol clearly or suggests the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot" or "5R normal jackpot", the state in which the main symbols of the same symbol are lined up in the effective line is displayed, and it is clearly indicated that it is a jackpot. Will be done. In addition, the jackpot type may be specified by the combination of the main symbols on the effective line, but it is not always specified. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", a state in which, for example, "777" symbol combinations set as a symbol combination indicating 16R probability variation jackpot among the main symbols are lined up in an effective line. Is displayed, or a state in which combinations of the same symbols other than "777" are lined up on the effective line is displayed. Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", a state in which symbol combinations such as "333", which are set in advance as symbol combinations indicating 5R probability variation jackpot among the main symbols, are lined up in the effective line is displayed. Or, a state in which the same combination of symbols other than the combination of symbols indicating 16R probability variation jackpot or 5R probability variation jackpot such as "777" and "333" is lined up in the effective line is displayed. Further, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the combination of the main symbols other than the symbol combination indicating the normal jackpot, for example, "222" or "444", which indicates the probability variation jackpot, is set. A state in which combinations of the same symbols are lined up on the effective line is displayed. Further, when the lottery result is "out of place", a state in which different combinations of main symbols are lined up on the effective line (for example, "323" or "723") is displayed.

Further, the symbol display unit 341 displays the symbol variation display in the variable game and the variable game effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit. If the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" and a state in which jackpot symbol combinations other than the combination of the main symbols indicating 16R probability variation jackpot is lined up on the effective line is displayed, the 5R probability variation jackpot is displayed as a variable game effect. Alternatively, a suggestion effect suggesting that the 5R is a normal jackpot is executed. In this case, in the variable game effect or the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 16R probability variable jackpot is executed. Similarly, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" and a state in which jackpot symbol combinations other than the combination of the main symbols indicating the probability variation jackpot are lined up on the effective line is displayed, the 5R normal jackpot is displayed as a variable game effect. A suggestion effect suggesting that is is executed. In this case, in the variable game effect or the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 5R probability variable jackpot is executed.

Further, when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state, the symbol display unit 341 displays a jackpot game effect including an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect. On the other hand, when the variable game effect or the jackpot game effect is not displayed (in the non-game state), the display screen of the symbol display unit 341 is changed to the top menu screen 72 (FIG. 25 (B)) by operating the operation button 20 of the player. ) Can be transferred to). Further, by operating the selection determination unit 21 (a plurality of selection buttons 21A (121 to 214) and the determination button 21B), the display screen on the symbol display unit 341 can be changed from the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25 (B)) to the character. It is possible to shift to another display screen in which game settings such as the selection screen 74 (see FIG. 25 (D)) can be set. In the present embodiment, a plurality of characters (specific selection subjects) displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the variable game effect are generated by operating the selection determination unit 21 (plural selection buttons 21A (121 to 214) and determination button 21B). It is possible to set the character to be selected from the characters (selection). The details of the character setting will be described later with reference to FIG. 29 and the like.

The magnet sensor 35 is provided around the first operating port 314 and on the back side of the game board 31. The magnet sensor 35 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the magnet sensor 35 is input to the main control unit 331. As a result, when an act of illegally guiding the game ball to the first operating port 314 using a magnet is performed, the fraudulent act can be detected. The magnet sensor 35 may be provided around the variable winning opening 316. As a result, in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game, when an act of winning a game ball that greatly exceeds the upper limit number is performed in the variable winning opening 316, it is possible to detect the fraudulent act.

The radio wave sensor 36 is provided around the first operating port 314 and the second operating port 315, and is provided on the back side of the game board 31. The radio wave sensor 36 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor 36 is input to the main control unit 331. As a result, when an act of illegally inputting radio waves to the ball entry sensors 314a and 315a to erroneously detect the entry of a game ball is performed, the fraudulent activity can be detected. The radio wave sensor 36 can detect radio waves of, for example, 50 MHz to 3 GHz. Further, the radio wave sensor 36 may be similarly provided around the special winning opening 319b.

The main display unit 37 includes an LED pair 371, two 7-segment displays 372, 373, and an LED group 374 arranged in the upper right portion of the game board 31. In the LED pair 371, the result of a lottery as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b in the main control unit 331 is displayed by a combination of lighting and extinguishing (lighting pattern) triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 317. In the 7-segment display 372, the variation display of the symbol is performed with the winning of the first operating port 314 as a trigger, and the symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 331 is stopped and displayed. In the 7-segment display 373, the variation display of the symbol is performed with the winning of the second operating port 315 as a trigger, and the symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 331 is stopped and displayed. In the LED group 374, the holding number N and the holding number M of the fluctuation display generated by winning the first operating port 314 and the second operating port 315 are displayed by the lighting patterns of the plurality of LEDs.

The movable accessory member 39 is a decorative member that can operate in a predetermined manner in the game machine 10 and is also generally referred to as an “accessory”. In the present embodiment, the movable accessory member 39 has a predetermined standby position (see FIG. 4) located above the symbol display unit 341 and an operating position (see FIG. 5) set below the standby position. It is possible to move along the surface of the symbol display unit 341 with and from. In the standby position shown in FIG. 4, a part of the movable accessory member 39 is exposed from the opening 31A, and most of the movable accessory member 39 is hidden around the opening 31A. Therefore, in the standby position, the movable accessory member 39 hardly hinders the visual recognition of the image effect performed on the symbol display unit 341. On the other hand, at the operating position shown in FIG. 5, the movable accessory member 39 covers the central portion of the symbol display unit 341, and the visual recognition of the image effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 is hindered. That is, the movable accessory operating effect of moving the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operating position is an example of the visual impairment effect of the present invention. Further, the movable accessory member 39 is an example of the movable member of the present invention, and constitutes the effect means of the present invention.

The movable accessory member 39 may be entirely hidden without being exposed from the opening 31A at the standby position. Further, the game machine 10 may include a plurality of movable accessory members 39. Further, the movable accessory member 39 may be a combination of a plurality of separated movable members, a member that can be deformed into two or more forms, and a member that includes a display such as a liquid crystal display device. Of course, the movable accessory member 39 is not limited to covering a part of the display screen of the symbol display unit 341, and may cover the entire display screen.

Such a movable accessory member 39 is controlled to operate in an effect for showing a lottery result in a big hit lottery in a variable game. In particular, the movable accessory member 39 is operated as a definite effect indicating that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a winning, and also is operated as a chance-up effect when the probability that the lottery is a big hit is high. Often. Further, in the present embodiment, the movable accessory member 39 is operated in the promotion effect and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect, which will be described later, in the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 6, the game machine 10 has a motor 39a that supplies a driving force to the movable accessory member 39, and a return detection unit 39b for detecting that the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby position. Has. The motor 39a is a stepping motor, a DC motor, or the like, and the return detection unit 39b is an optical sensor, a contact type sensor, or the like. The movable accessory member 39 and the motor 39a are connected via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear (not shown), and the movable accessory member 39 is directed from the standby position to the operating position according to the rotation direction of the motor 39a. Move downward or upward from the operating position toward the standby position.

Further, the game machine 10 includes a motor driver 39c to which the motor 39a and the return detection unit 39b are connected. The motor driver 39c is connected to the input / output I / F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5. Then, the motor driver 39c controls the motor 39a according to a control instruction from the voice lamp control device 5. Further, the motor driver 39c can acquire the detection result by the return detection unit 39b and transmit it to the voice lamp control device 5. The motor 39a and the return detection unit 39b may be directly connected to the input / output I / F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5 and controlled by the voice lamp control device 5.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 for storing the ball game balls supplied from the island facility (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 for paying out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls on the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

As shown in FIG. 6, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 in response to the operation of the launch handle 22. The power control device 9 converts the electric power supplied from the island facility (not shown) to which the game machine 10 is connected into a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the power to the control device and the driving means provided in the game machine 10.

[System configuration of game machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

[Main control unit 331]
The main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of the game in the game machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for transition to a preset jackpot gaming state. The main control device 4 is equipped with an MPU 41, an input / output I / F 42, and the like. The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and is an example of the main control means of the present invention. Further, the MPU 41 has a built-in ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, a part or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input / output I / F 42 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the main control device 4 and outputs a control signal from the main control device 4. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the magnet sensor 35, the radio wave sensor 36, the main display unit 37, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 has or does not enter the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the through gate 317 based on the detection signals from the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a. To judge. Further, the MPU 41 determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity using the magnet or the radio wave based on the detection signals from the magnet sensor 35 and the radio wave sensor 36. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, the power supply control device 9, and the like.

Then, the MPU 41 gives the voice lamp control device 5 a variable pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot game start command, a jackpot game end command, a round game start command, an ending start command, and a variable winning prize. Outputs commands such as a winning command, an error occurrence command, and an error resolution command.

The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the variation display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information on the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variation pattern command is the step S1612 in the variation start process of FIG. 15 based on the information stored in the hold storage area 412b described later when the symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 and the main display unit 37 is started. Is set in. The fluctuation pattern command may be a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of only the fluctuation display time. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

The first hold command and the second hold command are the lottery result, the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern in the jackpot lottery for the increased hold when the hold number N or the hold number M stored in the hold storage area 412b described later increases. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the number of holds N or the number of holds M. The first hold command and the second hold command are set based on the information stored in the hold storage area 412b, which will be described later, when the number of holds N or the number of holds M increases (first in FIG. 11). Step S1207 or step S1209 of the hold command setting process.

The shift command indicates the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 or the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 when the hold number N or the hold number M decreases. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the pass / fail information has been shifted. The shift command is set in step S1512 in the data setting process of FIG.

The jackpot game start command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game starts, that is, the game state shifts to the jackpot game state, and when the jackpot game state shifts, the jackpot game state is shown in FIG. It is set in step S1702 in the game control process. Further, since the jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game will start, the voice lamp control device 5 starts the jackpot game by receiving the jackpot game start command. Not only that, but also the opening can be grasped. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command so that the voice lamp control device 5 knows that the opening is started by the opening command.

The jackpot game end command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game ends, that is, the game state shifts from the jackpot game state to another game state, and is the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. It is set in step S1723 of.

The round game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the round information indicating the start of each round game and the round number of the round game in the open / close execution mode in the jackpot game. It is set in step S1813 in the opening / closing execution mode control process of FIG. In the voice lamp control device 5, it can be grasped that the opening is ended and the open / close execution mode is started by the round game start command, but the opening end command is set at the end of the opening separately from the round game start command. Alternatively, the open / close execution mode start command may be set when the open / close execution mode starts. Further, apart from the round game start command, a command indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started may be set at the start of the round game, and the command may be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5.

The ending start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the ending is started, that is, the opening / closing execution mode is finished, and when the ending is started, step S1718 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. Is set in.

The variable winning opening winning command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game ball has won the variable winning opening 316, and when the game ball wins the variable winning opening 316, the winning ball command setting process ( It is set in step S1303) of FIG.

The error occurrence command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that an error has occurred, and when an error occurs, the error determination process (step S1007) of FIG. 9 is performed as an error generation command according to the type of error. ) Is set.

The error resolution command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the error has been resolved, and when the error is resolved, the error determination process (step S1007) of FIG. 9 is performed as an error resolution command according to the type of error. ) Is set.

Although commands other than the above-mentioned commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, their description will be omitted.

Further, the main control device 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillating circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillating circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of the main timer interrupt process, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

In the present embodiment, the clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 is interrupted by the main timer described later every time a rising edge (or falling edge) of the clock signal occurs. It is assumed that the interrupt process is started and executed. The oscillation circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are also mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as needed, and supply the operation clock of the control main body in the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

The ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 and the like. The RAM 412 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the game machine 10 to perform a big hit lottery or the like will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 executes the jackpot lottery and the setting of the variable display time by using the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the hold storage area 412b, and the electric service hold area 412c of the RAM 412.

The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used for determining the loss type. included. Further, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation display time in the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341. Is done. Further, the lottery counter 412a is set to the normal hit random number counter C4 used for lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second operating port 315 is in the electric service open state, and the initial value setting of the normal hit random number counter C4. The normal hit initial value counter CIN2 used for is included. Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they are simply abbreviated as counters.

Then, the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value at short intervals by the MPU 41, and the counters return to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 when the jackpot lottery and the variable display time are set.

The hold storage area 412b includes a first hold storage area REA, a second hold storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first hold storage area REA includes a first hold area REA1, a second hold area REA2, a third hold area REA3, a fourth hold area REA4, and a hold number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, the type of the variable game in which the jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first reserved storage area REA and the 7-segment display 372 displays the variable display and the stop display is referred to as the first special symbol game. is there. The second hold storage area REB includes a first hold area REB1, a second hold area REB2, a third hold area REB3, a fourth hold area REB4, and a hold number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, the type of the variable game in which the jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reserved storage area REB and the 7-segment display 373 displays the variable display and the stop display is referred to as the second special symbol game. is there.

Then, when the game ball enters the first operating port 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as the winning / failing information used in the lottery, and is stored in one of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 of the first holding storage area REA. Further, when the game ball enters the second operating port 315, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as the winning / failing information used in the lottery, and is stored in one of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the second holding storage area REB. The acceptance / rejection information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 41 that functions as the determination means of the present invention by executing the process according to the control program. The lottery counters 412a (big hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, variable type counter CS1, etc.) are individually corresponding to the first hold storage area REA and the second hold storage area REB. It may be provided in.

As described above, in the game machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variable type counter CS1 is the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area of the first hold storage area REA. It is stored in one of the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the REA4 and the second reserved storage area REB.

Therefore, a big hit lottery for a variable game executed based on the hit / fail information stored in the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 and the second hold storage area REB. In addition to the lottery result of, it is possible to determine in advance the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first operating port 314, the hit / fail information is vacant in the priority order of the first holding area REA1, the second holding area REA2, the third holding area REA3, and the fourth holding area REA4. It is stored in the area where it is. In the hold number storage area NAA, the number of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 in which the hit / fail information is stored is stored as the hold number N.

Further, when the game ball enters the second operating port 315, the hit / fail information is vacant in the priority order of the first holding area REB1, the second holding area REB2, the third holding area REB3, and the fourth holding area REB4. Stored in the area. In the hold number storage area NAB, the number of the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 in which the hit / fail information is stored is stored as the hold number M.

That is, in the game machine 10, the first operating port 314 has a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of holdings of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 and the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4. It is possible to hold up to four winning / failing information as a winning history of the game ball to the second operating port 315.

In addition, it is considered as another embodiment that the first operating port 314 and the second operating port 315 are provided with a holding area having a maximum holding number of eight, and even in this case, a maximum of eight can be held in total. It is possible to withhold the winning / failing information as the winning history. The storage process of the pass / fail information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing the process according to the control program.

The execution area AE is the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA or the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB when the symbol change display on the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341 is started. It is a storage area used for moving the pass / fail information stored in. Specifically, the pass / fail information of the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and the pass / fail information does not exist in the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB. When the hold number storage area NAB is 0, the validity information of the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

The difference between the number of holds M stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA and the number of holds N stored in the hold number storage area NAB of the second hold storage area REB is 2 or more. In the case of, it is considered as another embodiment that the value of the holding area having the larger number is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. Further, it is also considered as another embodiment that the pass / fail information of the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA and the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB is alternately moved to the execution area AE.

Then, at the start of one variable game, the MPU 41 performs a big hit lottery or the like based on the numerical information stored as the hit / miss information in the execution area AE. At this time, when the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the pass / fail information stored in the second hold area REA2 shifts to the first hold area REA1 and the third The pass / fail information stored in the hold area REA3 shifts to the second hold area REA2, and the pass / fail information stored in the fourth hold area REA4 shifts to the third hold area REA3.

Similarly, when the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the hit / fail information stored in the second hold area REB2 shifts to the first hold area REB1 and is held third. The pass / fail information stored in the area REB3 shifts to the second hold area REB2, and the pass / fail information stored in the fourth hold area REB4 shifts to the third hold area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 738, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot depends on the winning / failing table stored in the winning / failing table storage area in the ROM 411, which is the low probability mode (first notification game state) which is the normal game state and the high probability mode (second) which is the probability variation game state. Two types are set according to the notification game state). Here, FIG. 8A is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability mode hit / fail table corresponding to a low-probability mode, and FIG. 8B is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability mode pass / fail table corresponding to a high-probability mode. In the examples shown in FIGS. 8 (A) and 8 (B), the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit in the low probability mode is two (373, 727), and the big hit in the high probability mode. The number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the lottery is a big hit is 13 (59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 373, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 727). Here, in the low-probability mode winning / failing table and the high-probability mode winning / failing table, two random numbers (373, 727) in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot are common, but it is possible that they are not common. Further, the random numbers that win the jackpot may not be discrete values, but may be partially or wholly continuous values. If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the random number values for winning the jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be missed.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315. In the game machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpots, the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot, is set by the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area in the ROM 411. Here, FIG. 8C is a diagram showing an example of a distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 8C, when the type of the variable game is the first special symbol game, the number of random numbers for the 5R probability variation jackpot is 10 from 0 to 9, and the number of random numbers for the 16R probability variation jackpot is 10. Is 5 from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that are usually 5R jackpots is 5 from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of the variable game is the second special symbol game, the number of random numbers for the 5R probability variation jackpot is 5 from 0 to 4, and the number of random numbers for the 16R probability variation jackpot is 10 from 5 to 14. Yes, the number of random numbers that are usually 5R jackpots is 5 from 15 to 19. That is, the game machine 10 is a so-called loop probability change machine in which the probability of the probability change jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is the same. Further, in the game machine 10, the probability of 16R probability variation jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than that in the first special symbol game. That is, in the probabilistic time-saving game state, the expected value of the game ball when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is set higher than the normal game state such as the normal time-saving game state or the normal non-time-saving game state. ing.

In the present embodiment, the first operating port 314 that triggers the execution of the first special symbol game by winning the game ball, and the second operating port that triggers the execution of the second special symbol game by winning the game ball. An individual distribution table is set for each 315, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs depending on which of the first operating port 314 and the second operating port 315 the game ball wins, but the first special symbol It is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same between the game and the second special symbol game. Further, the game machine 10 is not limited to the loop probabilistic machine, but may be configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a type-two type mixer, or the like.

Then, in the MPU 41, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot", and "5R normal". Determine whether it is a "big hit" or a "missing".

Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an open / close execution mode in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is repeated five times is executed. Further, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the open / close execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times is executed.

In the case of 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot, the probability variation is a high probability mode (second notification game state) in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high after the end of the jackpot game, and a high frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric accessory 315b is high. Shift to time saving mode. Then, the probability variation time saving mode is continued until the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is determined by the MPU 41 to be "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot" or "5R normal jackpot".

On the other hand, in the case of 5R normal jackpot, the normal time saving mode is a low probability mode (first notification game state) in which the jackpot winning probability is low after the jackpot game is completed and a high frequency support mode in which the opening probability of the electric accessory 315b is high. Is executed by. Then, the high frequency support mode in the normal time saving mode continues until the lottery of the preset number of times, for example, 50 times or 100 times, is completed.

By the way, when the game machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop probability change machine, a preset number of times (for example, 50 times, 100 times) of big hit lottery is performed after the end of the big hit game at the time of the probability change big hit. Is executed in the probability variation time saving mode (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), then shifts to the low probability mode, and the high frequency support mode ends. Further, in the variable game, it is also conceivable to perform a fall lottery from the probability variation time reduction mode to the normal time reduction mode or the low probability mode as another embodiment. If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is not correct, the jackpot game state and the high frequency support mode will not be entered. In the present embodiment, the case where the game machine 10 has three types of jackpots, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot, will be described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, 2 round probability variation jackpot, 2 It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types such as round regular jackpot and 16R regular jackpot.

Further, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315.

In the game machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order. Specifically, due to the out-of-type table stored in the out-of-type table storage area in ROM 411, the last stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the front-back off reach and the reach are also generated. The value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to each of the three types of outliers, that is, the reach other than the front-back deviation in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol, and the complete deviation in which reach does not occur, is set. Here, FIG. 8D is a diagram showing an example of an outlier type table. In the example shown in FIG. 8 (D), the value of the random number that is out of front and back is 0 to 8, the value of the random number that is reach other than front and back is 9 to 38, and the value of the random number that is completely out of line is 39. ~ 238. The MPU 41 determines that reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the variable game in which the 5R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot, or the 5R normal jackpot is won, that is, the variable game that shifts to the open / close execution mode.

Here, the reach indicates a state in which the symbol combination of the main symbols indicating that the jackpot has been won is likely to occur between the start of the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display unit 341 and the stop display of the symbol. It is a fluctuating state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the effective line on the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position fluctuates. In addition, while the reach of the symbol display unit 341 is in a fluctuating state, a story effect process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, or an operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect. Person participation type operation effect processing and the like are executed. It is conceivable that the variable display on the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden, reduced or enlarged, and displayed during the execution of these effect processing.

The electric accessory opening counter C4 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric service holding area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not the electric accessory 315b is opened for a predetermined time according to the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 412c. For example, it is considered that the winning is won when the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 0 to 199, and the loss is considered when the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 200 to 250.

The variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variable type counter CS1 determines a rough variable type such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and special reach as a variable game effect. The variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process described later is executed by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Further, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the preset fluctuation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 specifies the type of fluctuation pattern with reference to the normal jackpot fluctuation table, the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table, or the deviation fluctuation table stored in advance in the fluctuation table storage area of ROM 411. In addition, these fluctuation tables may be provided individually for each low-probability mode and high-probability mode. Further, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

Here, FIGS. 8 (E), 8 (F), and 8 (G) are diagrams showing an example of a normal jackpot fluctuation table, a probabilistic jackpot fluctuation table, and a deviation fluctuation table. As shown in FIGS. 8 (E), 8 (F), and 8 (G), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table, the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table, and the deviation fluctuation table, the fluctuation pattern is preliminarily set according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. It is associated. Then, the MPU 41 is a normal jackpot fluctuation table when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is "5R normal jackpot", a probability variation jackpot fluctuation table when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" or "16R probability variation jackpot", and a lottery. If the result is "off", refer to the out-of-variation table and specify the type of fluctuation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8 (E) and 8 (F), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table and the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table, the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" are obtained according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Is selected. When the variation pattern "01" is selected here, the symbol display unit 341 executes the variation display in the mode of normal reach in which the variation display time is 30 s. When the variation pattern "02" is selected, the symbol display unit 341 executes the variation display in a super reach mode in which the variation display time is 60 s. Further, when the variation pattern "03" is selected, the symbol display unit 341 executes the variation display in the mode of special reach in which the variation display time is the longest 90s. The types of fluctuation patterns are not limited to these. Further, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

For example, in the game machine 10, a plurality of types of normal reach having different characters, stories, and the like are prepared as normal reach corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “01”, and one of the normal reach selected from the normal reach is executed.

Similarly, in the game machine 10, a plurality of types of super reach having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as super reach corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "02", and one of the super reach selected from them is executed. To. Super reach is a reach with a longer fluctuation time than normal reach and a shorter fluctuation time than special reach, and there is a higher probability (expectation) that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot than normal reach, and the jackpot is won more than special reach. It is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) of doing so is low.

Further, in the game machine 10, a plurality of types of special reach having different characters, stories, and the like are prepared as special reach corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "03", and one of the special reach selected from them is executed. To. The special reach is a reach having a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach and the super reach, and is a reach including an effect that develops from the normal reach or the super reach, for example.

The reach corresponding to the fluctuation pattern includes a single-shot operation effect in which the single-shot operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, a continuous-stroke operation effect in which the continuous operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, and a game. A player-participation-type operation effect such as a long-press operation effect in which the long-press operation of the operation button 20 by a person is reflected in the effect may be included.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8 (G), in the deviation variation table, the variation type is determined for each stop type (front / rear deviation reach, non-front / rear deviation reach, complete deviation) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. The correspondence between the counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern is defined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of disconnection is front / rear deviation reach or non-front / rear deviation reach, one of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. .. On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of disengagement is completely deviated, either the fluctuation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the variation pattern "04" is selected, the symbol display unit 341 executes the variation display without reach with the variation display time of 7 s. Further, when the fluctuation pattern "05" is selected, the symbol display unit 341 executes the fluctuation display without reaching with the fluctuation display time of 10 s.

For example, in the game machine 10, as the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern "04", the variation display of the deviation pattern is stopped at the deviation pattern without accompanying the advance notice effect of displaying characters, messages, etc. Is executed. Further, in the game machine 10, as the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern "05", the variation display of the deviation pattern that stops at the deviation pattern is displayed with a notice effect of displaying a character, a message, or the like. Will be executed. Further, in the case of the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern "05", a player participation type operation effect reflecting the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be executed as a notice effect.

Then, when the MPU 41 specifies a fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time by the 7-segment display 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 41 issues a fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Input to the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the MPU41 has a fluctuation pattern command "A" in front of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R normal jackpot. Output any one of "A01" to "A03". Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 is a variation pattern command "B01" in which "B" indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot is added before the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". ~ Outputs any of "B03". Further, the MPU 41 is a variation pattern command "C01" in which, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", "C" indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot is added before the variation patterns "01" to "03". ~ Outputs any of "C03". Further, in the MPU 41, when the lottery result is "off", the fluctuation pattern commands "D01" to "D05" in which "D" indicating that the lottery is out are added before the fluctuation patterns "01" to "05". Output any of. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the fluctuation pattern command, and the symbol display unit 341 is based on the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result. The details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed in are determined. Then, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the fluctuation display based on the details of the determined fluctuation mode, reproduces the voice from the speaker 26 according to the fluctuation display, and lights and blinks the illumination unit 27. , Turn off the lights.

Therefore, in the game machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 executes a simple process of determining the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation table for the fluctuation display in the symbol display unit 341. It will be. Therefore, even when the MPU 41 of the game machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the jackpot lottery can be stably executed by the MPU 41. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the voice lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variation modes as the variation mode.

[Sub control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 6, the sub control unit 332 includes a voice lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and a symbol variation display and a symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331. Execute the effect display.

[Voice lamp control device 5]
The voice lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input / output I / F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 51 has a built-in ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

The ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. In addition, the ROM 511 also stores information such as voices used in the variable game effect, the jackpot game effect, and the lamp blinking pattern. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. The RAM 512 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

The voice lamp control device 5 commands the display control device 6 based on the command (control signal) input from the main control device 4 by executing the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51. (Control signal) is input to control the display of the symbol display unit 341. Further, the voice lamp control device 5 also controls the reproduced voice output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the reproduced voice output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 when executing the variable game effect and the jackpot game effect described later.

The input / output I / F 52 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the voice lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, a fluctuation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot game start command, a jackpot game end command, a jackpot game start command, and a jackpot game end Commands such as commands, round game start command, ending start command, variable winning opening winning command, error occurrence command, and error elimination command are input. Further, the voice lamp control device 5 outputs a display fluctuation pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. As another embodiment, the display control device 6 may receive a command from the main control device 4 and input the command to the voice lamp control device 5. Further, another embodiment is also conceivable in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having both the functions of the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

Further, a speaker 26, an illumination unit 27, and a motor driver 39c are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the voice output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27, and the like based on the command input from the main control device 4. Further, the MPU 51 can control the motor 39a via the motor driver 39c to operate the movable accessory member 39 (see FIGS. 4 and 5), and obtains the detection result by the return detection unit 39b. It is possible to determine whether or not the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby state. Further, an operation switch 20a, an upper selection operation switch 211a, a lower selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, a right selection operation switch 211d, and a determination operation switch 21Ba are connected to the input / output I / F 52. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that an operation has been performed on the operation button 20, the plurality of selection buttons 21A (121 to 214), and the decision button 21B, and executes the operation on the symbol display unit 341 based on the detection result. It is also possible to control the game effect to be performed, the sound output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27, and the like.

The MPU 51 includes a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot game start command, a jackpot game end command, an open / close actual mode start command, and an open / close actual mode end command input from the main control device 4. , Round game start command, round game end command, variable winning opening winning command, and other commands are used to execute predetermined arithmetic processing.

Specifically, when the variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 has a variation pattern (combination of stop symbols of the main symbol, variation display time, variation type (see FIG. 31 (B))) and variation pattern based on the variation pattern command. The effect type (see FIGS. 32 (A) to 32 (C)) is determined, and the display fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6 (steps S2703 to 3 in the command determination process of FIG. 30). (See S2705), the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display unit 341, when the variation pattern command indicates an deviation, the combination of the main symbols corresponding to the deviation is displayed. On the other hand, when the variable pattern command indicates a 5R normal jackpot, the combination of the main symbols corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot is displayed, and when the variable pattern command indicates the 5R probability variable jackpot, the combination of the main symbols corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot or the 5R probability variable jackpot is displayed. Is displayed, and when 16R probability variation jackpot is indicated, a combination of main symbols corresponding to 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot is displayed. When the variation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type, the MPU 51 stores the information on the jackpot type in the RAM 512, and when the jackpot game start command is received, the RAM 512 stores the information on the jackpot game effect. Refer to the stored information regarding the jackpot type (see step S2804 in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 33).

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on a command (control signal) input from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the voice lamp control device 5.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input / output I / F 62, and the like, and the voice lamp control device 5 and the symbol display unit 341 are connected to the input / output I / F 62. Bidirectional communication may be possible between the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and the MPU 61 has a ROM 611 and a RAM 612 built-in. Further, the display control device 6 also has a built-in other circuit such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, a part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

In addition to the control program, the ROM 611 includes variable symbols such as the main symbol used in the symbol variable display of the symbol display unit 341, a notice effect image, a reach effect image, a jackpot effect image, an off effect image, and an opening used in the jackpot game effect. A plurality of types of images such as an effect image, an opening / closing execution effect image, an ending effect image, a top menu image used in the game setting, a game setting image developed from the top menu image, and a character setting image are stored. The image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 includes a still image and a moving image. In the present embodiment, at least the reach effect image, the opening effect image, and the opening / closing execution effect image include a plurality of character effect images in which images of some or all of the plurality of characters prepared in advance are displayed. Further, the ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes not only the type and display timing of the image to be used, but also the variable display time of the variable symbol. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays the image on the symbol display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the variation display pattern command, thereby realizing the symbol variation display and the effect display.

The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 61. The RAM 612 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input / output I / F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 71 has a built-in ROM 711 and RAM 712.

The ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. Further, the RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71. The RAM 712 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

The input / output I / F 72 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input / output I / F 72.

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out the game ball from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23, and has a drive unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stop member for switching whether or not the game ball is paid out. It is provided with a payout sensor 132b that individually detects the game balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result by the payout sensor 132b. Further, the payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error such as a ball clogging of the payout device 132 occurs.

The ball rental device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the game machine 10. Then, the ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to the operation of the ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the game machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the set amount and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal for paying out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 to generate a predetermined number of game balls. It will be paid out. The recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium containing an IC chip. Further, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls according to the cash by inserting cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the drive of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feed device 322 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated to launch the game ball stored in the upper plate 23 on the launch rail 321. Supply on. Then, the launch control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the launch handle 22, and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation to direct the game ball on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31. And fire. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON / OFF at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. As a result, in the game machine 10, one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 22. As a result, the launch control IC 81 increases the firing intensity of the game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 32 as the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 22 increases, based on the voltage value input according to the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 22. The voltage applied to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so that it becomes stronger.

Further, the launch handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily stop the launch of the game ball. Is provided. The launch control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 by the touch sensor 21a, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism 32 is stopped. As a result, for example, the launch handle 22 is fixed in a rotationally operated state, and the game is prevented in a situation where the player is not touching the launch handle 22. Further, the player can stop the firing of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b at an arbitrary timing with his thumb or the like while rotating the firing handle 22.

[Power control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a + 12V voltage for driving various sensors, a drive unit, and the like, a + 5V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated + 12V or + 5V voltage to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, and the like.

The power control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on / off the power of the game machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when the game machine 10 is returned to the initial state. The game machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 91 is ON.

Further, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means for being charged by the electric power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the game machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information of the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the game machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

Further, when the power supply control device 9 determines that the power supply is cut off, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power supply control device 9 is in a power failure state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. Judge. When the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like receive the power failure signal from the power control device 9, the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like interrupt the ongoing control and execute a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main control unit 4]
Next, the process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 18. Specifically, in the game machine 10, the MPU 41 is executed at the time of power-on, a start-up process, a main process executed after the start-up process, a main timer interrupt process that is periodically started, and a power failure. Execute NMI interrupt processing and so on. In this embodiment, the start-up process, the NMI interrupt process, and the like will be omitted, and the main timer interrupt process and the main process will be described.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 9 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec.

<Step S1001>
First, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process for determining the detection state of the sensor or switch connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection states of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the magnet sensor 35, the radio wave sensor 36, and the like are determined. At this time, when the entry of the game ball into any of the entry sensors 313a to 317a is detected, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as the winning detection information.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 added 1 to each of the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4, and the counter values reached the maximum value. If so, the counter value is cleared to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes the start winning process (step S1004) accompanying the winning of the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315, and executes the firing control process (step S1005). The details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the launch control process, the game ball is on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to enable the firing of. Further, the launch control process invalidates the launch of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. It is a process to do. The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch the game ball when the launch of the game ball is effective.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 draws a lottery as to whether or not to set the electric accessory 315b of the second operating port 315 to the electric service open state based on the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 412c. Execute the process. Specifically, in the through-gate process, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the current game mode is the high-frequency support mode based on the high-frequency mode flag. Then, the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 0 to 29 when it is not in the high frequency support mode, and disengages when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 30 to 249. Judge that. Further, in the case of the high frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and disengages when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 200 to 249. Judge that. Then, when the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol has been won in the through gate processing, the electric accessory 315b is opened for a predetermined time. As a result, the game ball can be won in the second operating port 315 on the upper right side of the game board 31 in which the electric accessory 315b is arranged side by side.

<Step S1007>
In step S1007, the MPU 41 determines whether or not an error has occurred, and if an error has occurred, executes an error process that determines whether or not the error has been resolved. When an error occurs, the MPU 41 sets the error occurrence flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON according to the error type, and sets the error occurrence command in the RAM 412. On the other hand, when the error is resolved, the MPU 41 sets the error flag according to the resolved error type to off and sets the error resolution command in the RAM 412. Examples of the error include a ball jam error, a full tank error, a magnet detection error, a radio wave detection error, a vibration detection error, an abnormal winning error, and a door opening error. Ball jam error, full dish error, etc. are classified as normal errors, and magnet detection error, radio wave detection error, vibration detection error, abnormal winning error, door opening error, etc. are classified as fraud detection errors. In addition, a fraud detection error is positioned as an error that needs to be notified immediately after the error occurs, and a normal error is positioned as an error that does not need to be notified immediately after the error occurs.

[Starting prize processing]
Here, the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 of FIG. 9 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
First, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first operating port 314. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the first operating port 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has not won the first operating port 314. Then (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of holds N is the maximum number of holds (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1106. On the other hand, in the MPU 41, if the hold number N is not the maximum hold number (step S1102: No), 1 is added to the hold number N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 9, and a variable type counter CS1 updated in the main process described later (step S1302 of FIG. 12). And S1310), and the count value is stored in the first free hold area of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 of the first hold storage area REA of the hold storage area 412b in the RAM 412. ..

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 displays the content of the hit / miss information before the hit / miss information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 becomes the target of determining the hit / miss of the jackpot in the fluctuation start process (S1408 in FIG. 13 and FIG. 15) described later. Confirmation is performed, and the first hold command setting process for setting the first hold command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the confirmation result. The details of the first hold command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second operating port 315. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the second operating port 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has not won the second operating port 315. Then (step S1106: No), the start winning process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the hold number M is the maximum hold number (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and shifts the process to step S1005 of FIG. On the other hand, in the MPU 41, if the hold number M is not the maximum hold number (step S1107: No), 1 is added to the hold number M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 acquires counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 9, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in the main process described later. Then, the counter value is stored in the first free hold area of the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the second hold storage area REB of the hold storage area 412b in the RAM 412.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 receives the hit / fail information before the hit / miss information for the second hold acquired in step S1109 becomes a target for determining the hit / miss of the jackpot in the variable start processing (S1408 in FIG. 13 and FIG. 15) described later. The contents are confirmed, and the second hold command setting process for setting the second hold command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the confirmation result. Here, since the second hold command setting process is the same as the first hold command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 11, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the second hold command setting process, in the first hold command setting process of FIG. 11, if the "first hold command" is read as the "second hold command" and the "hold number N" is read as the "hold number M". Good.

[1st hold command setting process]
Here, the first hold command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 of FIG. 10 will be described with reference to FIG. The first hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first hold command, and information such as the type (big hit type or deviation) of the first hold command, the fluctuation pattern, and the number of holds N. ..

<Step S1201>
In step S1201, the MPU 41 reads the hold number N from the hold number storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first hold from the RAM 412.

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in the high probability mode, and if it is in the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process shifts to step S1203, and if it is not in the high probability mode (step S1202). : No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in the high probability mode based on the high probability mode flag that can be set to be turned on in the game state transition process (step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 12) described later. The high-probability mode flag is set by the MPU 41 to be on when transitioning to high-probability mode and off when transitioning to low-probability mode.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning based on the high probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 8B). Executes the pass / fail judgment of. On the other hand, in step S1204, in the MPU 41, is the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 a value corresponding to the jackpot winning based on the low probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 8A)? Performs a pass / fail judgment.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the count value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the count value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process shifts to step S1206, and the jackpot random number counter C1 If it is determined that the count value read from is not a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the count values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the hit / fail information is stored in the third hold storage area RE3 in step S1104 of FIG. 10, the jackpot type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1 included in the hit / miss information stored in the third hold storage area RE3. The count value of is read out. Of the first hold storage area RE1 to the fourth hold storage area RE4, the hold area in which the pass / fail information is stored in step S1104 of FIG. 10 is determined by the value of the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NA. It is possible.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1 and the hold number N in the first hold command. As described above, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that receives the first hold command is the hold number included in the first hold command. By referring to N, it is possible to recognize which of the first hold storage area RE1 to the fourth hold storage area RE4 the first hold command corresponds to the pass / fail information stored.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the count value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out, the variable type counter CS1 and the hold number N in the first hold command (step S1209).

The first hold command set to be turned on in the first hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and is executed in the main process step S1301 of FIG. 12 described later, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. It is erased after being transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 together with the command of. Further, the content of the first hold command described here is only an example, and if the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command, it is not limited to the content described here. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the first hold command is included in another command.

[Main processing of main control unit 4]
Next, the main process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIG. In the main process, the main control process for the progress of the variable game and the jackpot game is executed. In the main process, the processes of steps S1301 to S1307 are executed as periodic processes of, for example, a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update processes of steps S1308 to S1310 are executed in the remaining time from the end of the processes of steps S1301 to S1307 to the next cycle. To.

<Step S1301>
First, in step S1301, the MPU 41 transmits output data such as a command set in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 9 or the previous main process to a control device such as a sub control unit 332 or a peripheral control unit 140. Execute the process. For example, in RAM412, commands such as a variable pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot game start command, a jackpot game end command, a variable winning opening winning command, an error occurrence command, and an error elimination command are set. If so, the command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. Further, when the prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process in step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variable type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the variable type counter CS1 and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets the prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a prize has occurred in the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316, or the like, based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. Then, when a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize is set in the RAM 412. Further, when the MPU 41 determines that a prize has been generated in the variable winning opening 316 based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412, the MPU 41 sets the variable winning opening winning command in the RAM 412. This variable winning opening winning command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1301 of the main processing. As a result, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 can cause the symbol display unit 341 to display the number of payouts of the game balls (ball payout display) in the jackpot game.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a variable game control process for controlling the game in the variable game. Although the details of the variable game control process will be described later, in the variable game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and the variable pattern command required for the symbol variable display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 has a jackpot random number counter C1 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 9, a jackpot type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, and a variable type counter CS1 updated in steps S1302 and S1310. Based on each value of, a variation pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variation display time is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. The details of the jackpot game control process will be described later, but in the jackpot game control process, by controlling the opening and closing of the opening / closing door 316b, a round game in which the game ball can enter the variable winning opening 316 is performed a plurality of times. Execute. As a result, the player can acquire a large number of game balls in the jackpot game.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in step S1604 in the fluctuation start process of FIG. In the game state transition process, the MPU 41 sets the game state when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a jackpot game state having an open / close execution mode, a probabilistic time-short game state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a low probability mode and a high frequency. It shifts to the normal non-time saving game state which is the support mode, and the normal non-time saving game state which is not the high frequency support mode in the low probability mode.

For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to the jackpot game state after the end of the variable game for the jackpot, and executes the jackpot game having the opening / closing execution mode. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. On the other hand, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game has ended based on whether or not the jackpot game end flag set to be on in step S1722 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 16 described later is on. , When it is determined that the jackpot game is completed, the gaming state is changed from the jackpot gaming state to a predetermined gaming state.

Specifically, the 5R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, or the 5R normal jackpot flag, which is set to be ON in steps S1607, S1608, or S1609 in the variation start process of FIG. 15 described later, is turned on at the end of the variation game for the jackpot. In this case, by setting the jackpot game start flag to on, the game state after the end of the variable game for the jackpot is shifted to the jackpot game state.

Further, after the end of the jackpot game, the MPU 41 changes the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to a predetermined game based on which of the above-mentioned 5R probability variation jackpot flag, 16R probability variation jackpot flag, and 5R normal jackpot flag is set to ON. Move to the state. For example, when the 5R probability variation jackpot flag or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set to on, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to the probability variation time-shortening gaming state. Further, when the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to the normal time saving gaming state.

Further, when the transition of the gaming state is shifted, the MPU 41 sets the gaming state flag for the game state after the transition to on. For example, the MPU 41 sets the high-probability mode flag to on when the gaming state is shifted to the probabilistic time-shortening gaming state, and sets the time-saving mode flag to on when the gaming state is shifted to the normal time-saving gaming state. To do. Further, when the time saving mode flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 sets a preset number of time saving times (50 times, 100 times, etc.) as the number of times of executing the variable game in the time saving mode in the time saving counter. On the other hand, when the gaming state is changed from the jackpot gaming state to another gaming state, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot flag set to ON among the 5R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 5R normal jackpot flag. Set to off.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes the display control process of the main display unit 37. By this display control processing, the 7-segment display 372 and 373 in the main display unit 37 executes the symbol variation display only during the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the symbol variation display is a symbol indicating the lottery result. It will be displayed as a stop. In addition, due to the display control process, each LED lamp blinks on the LED pair 371 in the main display unit 37 only during the predetermined normal symbol fluctuation display time, and the pair of LED lamps are turned on and off depending on whether or not the normal symbol is won. It will be indicated by the lighting pattern which is a combination of. In the case of winning a normal symbol, the electric accessory 315b attached to the second operating port 315 is opened for a predetermined time.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1308: Yes), the process shifts to step S1301 and executes each process after S1301 described above. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1308: No), the execution timing of the next main process is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process arrives. During the remaining time until it is reached, step S1308, step S1309 and step S1310 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1308: Yes).

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the variable type counter CS1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, after updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1308.

[Variable game control processing]
Here, with reference to FIG. 13, the variable game control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. 12 will be described.

<Step S1401>
In step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game machine 10 is in the jackpot game, and if it is in the jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), the variable game control process is terminated and the game is not in the jackpot game. In the case (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. For example, whether or not the jackpot game is executed is determined based on the jackpot game execution flag that the MPU 41 sets on at the start of the jackpot game and turns off at the end of the jackpot game. Further, when the jackpot game execution flag is set to on at the start of the jackpot game, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start command in the RAM 412 and transmits this jackpot game start command to the voice lamp control device 5. On the other hand, when the jackpot game start flag is set to off at the end of the jackpot game, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game end command in the RAM 412 and transmits this jackpot game end command to the voice lamp control device 5.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation is being displayed, and if the symbol variation is being displayed (step S1402: Yes), the process is shifted to step S1403, and if the symbol variation is not being displayed, the process is shifted to step S1403. (Step S1402: No), the process shifts to step S1406. For example, whether or not the symbol variation is being displayed is set to ON in step S1614 in the variation start process of FIG. 15 described later, and when the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the variation game process is performed. The determination is made based on the variable display flag set to off in step S1405 of.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variation display time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation display, and if it determines that the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1404. If it is determined that the variation display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the variation game control process is terminated.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
When the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 stops and displays the symbols corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable game on the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37 (step S1403: Yes). Step S1404), the variable display flag is set to off (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
When the symbol variation is not displayed (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 has a hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the hold storage area 412b and a hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAB. It is determined whether or not both are 0 (step S1406). Here, when both the number of holds N and the number of holds M are 0 (step S1406: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the variable game control process. On the other hand, when either one of the number of holds N and the number of holds M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes a data setting process for the data of the hit / miss information stored in the hold storage area 412b. When the MPU 41 finishes the process of step S1407, the process shifts to step S1408. The details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a variation start process for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute a variation display based on the hit / miss information stored in the execution area AE, and ends the variation game control process. The details of the fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, an example of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
In step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0, and if the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1502. To do. On the other hand, when the number of holds M is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
When the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA (step S1502), and shifts from the first hold area REA1 to the execution area AE. The pass / fail information is moved (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the pass / fail information of the second reserved area REA2 to the fourth reserved area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the pass / fail information of the second hold area REA2 is moved to the first hold area REA1, the pass / fail information of the third hold area REA3 is moved to the second hold area REA2, and the fourth hold area REA4. The pass / fail information is moved to the third holding area REA3. When the process of step S1504 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505-S1507>
Step S1505 shifts to the case where the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 shifts to the case where both or one of the hold number M and the hold number N is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. (Step S1406: Yes). Therefore, when the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the hold number N is not 0, and therefore executes the processes of steps S1505 to S1507.

Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the hit / fail information from the first hold area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the pass / fail information of the second reserved area REB2 to the fourth reserved area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the pass / fail information of the second hold area REB2 is moved to the first hold area REB1, the pass / fail information of the third hold area REB3 is moved to the second hold area REB2, and the fourth hold area REB4. The pass / fail information is moved to the third holding area REB3. When the process of step S1507 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Step S1508 and Step S1509>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time saving mode flag set to be on in the game state transition processing of step S1306 in the main processing of FIG. 12 is set to on, and the time saving mode flag is set to on. If so (step S1508: Yes), the counter value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S1509). On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1512 when the time saving mode flag is set to off (step S1508: No).

<Steps S1510 and S1511>
In step S1510, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S1510). Here, when the counter value of the time saving counter is 0 (step S1510: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time saving mode flag to off (step S1511), and shifts the process to step S1512. If the value of the time saving counter is not 0 (step S1510: No), the process proceeds to step S1512 without setting the time saving mode flag to off.

<Step S1512>
In step S1512, the MPU 41 sets a shift command in the RAM 412 indicating that the pass / fail information of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 or the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 has been shifted. Then, the shift command set in step S1512 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 12) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is changed. When the process of step S1512 is completed, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process and shifts the process to step S1408 of FIG.

[Fluctuation start processing]
Here, an example of the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not the high probability mode flag set to be turned on in the game state transition process in step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 12 is set to on (step S1601), and the high probability mode flag is turned on. When is set to (step S1601: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1602, and when the high probability mode flag is set to off (step S1601: No), the process proceeds to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
When the high probability mode flag is set to on (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 is currently stored in the execution area AE based on the high probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 8B). Whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the jackpot winning is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed (step S1602). On the other hand, when the high probability mode flag is set to off (step S1601: No), the MPU 41 is currently stored in the execution area AE based on the low probability mode pass / fail table (see FIG. 8A). It is executed (step S1603) whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the win / loss information is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning.

<Steps S1604 to S1610>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a big hit. Then, when the result of the hit / fail determination is a jackpot (step S1604: Yes), the jackpot type is determined (steps S1605 and S1606). Specifically, the MPU 41 has a jackpot type of 5R probability variation jackpot based on the jackpot type counter C2 currently stored in the execution area AE and the distribution table (see FIG. 8C). (Step S1605), and whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S1606).

When the jackpot type is 5R probability variation jackpot (step S1605: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 5R probability variation jackpot flag to on (step S1607). The 5R probability variation jackpot flag indicates whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery of the hit / fail information currently stored in the execution area AE is a 5R probability variation jackpot. Further, in step S1607, the stop result of the main display unit 37 in the variable game in which the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variation jackpot is also set based on the hit / miss information. The 5R probability variation jackpot flag is set to off at the end of the fluctuation start processing. When the process of step S1607 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1611.

When the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot (step S1605: No, step S1606: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 16R probability variation jackpot flag to on (step S1608). The 16R probability variation jackpot flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the hit / miss information currently stored in the execution area AE is the 16R probability variation jackpot. Further, in step S1608, the stop result of the main display unit 37 in the variable game in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variation jackpot is also set based on the winning / failing information. The 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set to off at the end of the fluctuation start processing. When the process of step S1608 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1611.

When the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S1605: No, step S1606: No), the MPU 41 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag provided in the RAM 412 to ON (step S1609). The 5R normal jackpot flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the winning / failing information currently stored in the execution area AE is the 5R normal jackpot. Further, in step S1609, the stop result of the main display unit 37 in the variable game in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot is also set based on the winning / failing information. When the process of step S1609 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1611.

The MPU 41 can determine the jackpot type based on the jackpot flag set to be ON in any of steps S1607 to S1609, and can determine the number of round games (number of rounds) executed in the open / close execution mode. You can judge.

On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail determination is not a big hit (step S1604: No), the MPU 41 sets the miss flag to on (step S1610). The off flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the hit / miss information currently stored in the execution area AE is out of order. Further, in step S1610, the stop result of the main display unit 37 in the variable game in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order is also set based on the winning / failing information. The off flag is set to off at the end of the fluctuation start processing. When the process of step S1610 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1611.

<Step S1611>
In step S1611, the MPU 41 sets the variation display time of the 7-segment display 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation game in the variation display time counter. Specifically, when the normal jackpot flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 specifies the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 8E). Further, when the 5R probability variation jackpot flag or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 8F). Further, when the deviation flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 specifies the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the deviation fluctuation table (see FIG. 8 (G)).

<Step S1612>
In step S1612, the MPU 41 sets the RAM 412 with a variation pattern command including the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variation game and the variation pattern identified in step S1611. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 12) executed by the MPU 41, the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 displays the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern command. The symbol variation display by the unit 341 is executed.

As described above, when the lottery result is "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 has "A01" to "A" in which "A" indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot is added to the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". Any one of "A03" is set in RAM412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 is any of "B01" to "B03" in which "B" indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot is added to the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". Is set in RAM412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 is any of "C01" to "C03" in which "C" indicating that the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" is added to the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". Is set in RAM412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is "off", the MPU 41 changes any of "D01" to "D08" in which "D" indicating that the lottery results are out of "01" to "08" is added. Set to RAM 412 as a command. Further, when the lottery result is "out of place", the MPU 41 includes information on whether the lottery result is "out of front / back", reach other than front / back out, or complete out of order in the variation pattern command.

<Steps S1613 and S1614>
The MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display of the main display unit 37 (step S1613), and sets the variation display in-progress flag to on (step S1614). The symbol variation display started here stops in the state of the stop result set in any of steps S1607 to S1610 after the variation display time set in step S1611 elapses.

<Steps S1615 and S1616>
In step S1615, the MPU 41 determines whether the disengagement flag is set to on. When the disengagement flag is set to on (step S1615: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the disengagement flag to off (step S1616), and ends the fluctuation start process. On the other hand, when the disengagement flag is set to off (step S1615: No), the MPU 41 ends the fluctuation start process.

In the fluctuation start process, the jackpot flags set to be on in steps S1607 to S1609 are not set to off, and these jackpot flags are the jackpot game control process (step S1305) in the main process of FIG. It is set to off when the round game number R corresponding to the jackpot type is set in step S1703 in the jackpot game control process.

[Big hit game control process]
Here, an example of the jackpot game control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1305 of FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG. In the jackpot game control process, control is executed for executing a round game in which a game ball can enter the variable winning opening 316 a plurality of times. Further, FIG. 17A is a time chart showing an example of a 5R jackpot game, and FIG. 17B is a time chart showing an example of a 16R jackpot game. In the following, an example of the 5R jackpot game and the 16R jackpot game will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 (A) and 17 (B), and then the jackpot game control process will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, the 5R jackpot game and the 16R jackpot game consist of an opening, an opening / closing execution mode, and an ending.

The opening is the period from the transition to the jackpot game state to the start of the open / close execution mode. Further, in the opening, the symbol display unit 341 indicates, for example, the type of jackpot (number of rounds, whether or not it is a probability variation) and the number of consecutive villas is displayed, and the operation method of the firing handle 22 in the jackpot game. Is instructed.

In the open / close execution mode, the round game is executed the number of times according to the jackpot type. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17 (A), a 5R jackpot game in which a round game is executed five times in the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot and a 5R normal jackpot is performed, and as shown in FIG. 17 (B), 16R In the case of a probabilistic jackpot, a 16R jackpot game is performed in which a round game is executed 16 times.

Here, the round game is a game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened. In the round game, the variable winning opening 316 is closed when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or when a predetermined number or more (for example, 9 or more) of game balls win the variable winning opening 316. Further, in the present embodiment, an interval (for example, 1.5 seconds) in which the closed state of the variable winning opening 316 is maintained for a predetermined time is provided between the round games in the open / close execution mode. That is, the opening / closing execution mode is executed in the order of round game → interval → round game → interval → round game ... → round game. However, it is not always necessary to set the interval in the open / close execution mode. For example, the interval may be substantially eliminated by opening the variable winning opening 316 immediately after the variable winning opening 316 is closed, or a plurality of variable winning openings 316 are provided and these variable winning openings 316 are alternated. The interval may be substantially eliminated by opening to.

The ending is the period from the end of the open / close execution mode to the end of the jackpot game. In the ending, the symbol display unit 341 suggests or clearly indicates the game state that shifts after the jackpot game ends. However, in the present embodiment, in the ending, the game state to be shifted after the jackpot game is completed is not suggested, and the game state of the transition destination, that is, the probability variation time-short game state which is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and the low probability. It is clarified whether to shift to the normal time saving game state which is the mode and the high frequency support mode. Further, in the ending, in general, the symbol display unit 341 also displays information on the number of balls to be played, such as the number of consecutive villas for big hits, the number of balls to be played in the big hit game, and the total number of balls to be played in the villa.

<Step S1701>
Returning to the description of FIG. 16, in step S1701, the MPU 41 has the jackpot game start flag set to be turned on in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 12, that is, the jackpot game is set to on. Decide whether to start. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1702 when the jackpot game start flag is set to on (step S1701: Yes), and processes when the jackpot game start flag is set to off (step S1701: No). To step S1706.

<Step S1702>
When starting the jackpot game (step S1701: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start command in the RAM 412 (step S1702). This jackpot game start command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the jackpot game effect to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 and the speaker 26 (steps S2707 and 33 in FIG. 30), and can start the jackpot game effect (FIG. 44). Steps S3201 to S3206).

<Step S1703>
In step S1703, the MPU 41 sets the number of round games R to be executed in the open / close execution mode based on the jackpot flag set to be on in any of steps S1607 to S1609 in the fluctuation start process of FIG. For example, when the jackpot flag is the 5R probability variation jackpot flag (step S1607 in FIG. 15) or the 5R normal jackpot flag (step S1609 in FIG. 15), the MPU 41 stores the round game number R as “5” in the RAM 412. On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is the 16R probability variation jackpot flag (step S1608 in FIG. 15), the MPU 41 stores the round game number R as “16” in the RAM 412. As a result, the MPU 41 executes a round game having the number of round games R according to the jackpot type in the opening / closing execution mode control process in step S1714 described later. When the round game number R in the open / close execution mode is set, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot flag, which has been set to on, to off.

<Step S1704 and Step S1705>
In step S1704, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot start flag to off and further sets the opening flag to on (step S1705). The opening flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1706 described later, and the MPU 41 grasps the timing of starting the open / close execution mode based on the opening flag.

<Step S1706>
In step S1706, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening flag set on in step S1705 is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening has been started. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1707 when the opening flag is set to on (step S1706: Yes), and shifts the process to step S1713 when the opening flag is set to off (step S1706: Yes). Transition.

<Step S1707>
When the opening flag is set to ON (step S1706: Yes), the MPU 41 determines, when starting the opening, whether or not the opening time is being clocked, which will be started in step S1708 described later. (Step S1707). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1709 when the opening time is being timed (step S1707: Yes), and shifts the process to step S1708 when the opening time is not being timed (step S1707: No).

<Step S1708>
In step S1708, the MPU 41 starts timing the opening time after starting the opening, and ends the jackpot game control process. The opening time measured in step S1708 is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether or not to end the opening and shift to the open / close execution mode in step S1709 described later.

<Step S1709>
In step S1709, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening time at which timing starts in step S1708 has reached a predetermined predetermined time required for executing the opening. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1710 when the opening time has reached the predetermined time (step S1709: Yes), and when the opening time has not reached the predetermined time (step S1709: No), the jackpot game control process. To finish.

<Steps S171 to S1712>
When the opening time has reached a predetermined time (step S1709: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the opening flag to off (step S1710), ends the time counting of the opening time (step S1711), and sets the open / close execution mode flag. Set to on (step S1712). As a result, the MPU 41 can finish the opening and shift to the open / close execution mode. The open / close execution mode flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1713 described later, and the MPU 41 executes the open / close execution process (step S1714) described later when the open / close execution mode flag is set to ON.

<Step S1713>
In step S1713, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the open / close execution mode flag set to be on in step S1712 is set to on. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1714 when the open / close execution mode flag is set to on (step S1713: Yes), and processes when the open / close execution mode flag is set to off (step S1713: No). To step S1715.

<Step S1714>
In step S1714, the MPU 41 executes the open / close execution mode control process. In the open / close execution mode control process, the MPU 41 executes a round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened a plurality of times according to the jackpot type. The details of the open / close execution mode control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1715>
In step S1715, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending flag set to be on in step S1809 in the opening / closing execution mode control process of FIG. 18 described later is set to on. When the ending flag is set to on (step S1715: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1716, and when the ending flag is set to off (step S1715: No), the jackpot game control process To finish.

<Step S1716>
When the ending flag is set to ON (step S1715: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending time, which will be timed in step S1717 described later, is being clocked when the ending is started. (Step S1716). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1719 when the ending time is being timed (step S1716: Yes), and shifts the process to step S1717 when the ending time is not being timed (step S1716: No).

<Steps S1717 and S1718>
In step S1717, the MPU 41 starts timing the ending time after starting the ending, further sets the ending start command in the RAM 412 (step S1718), and ends the jackpot game control process. The ending time measured in step S1717 is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether or not to end the ending (big hit game) in step S1719 described later.

<Step S1719>
In step S1719, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending time at which timing starts in step S1717 has reached a predetermined predetermined time required for executing the ending. When the ending time has reached the predetermined time (step S1719: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1720, and when the ending time has not reached the predetermined time (step S1719: No), the jackpot game control process To finish.

<Steps S1720 to S1722>
When the ending time has reached a predetermined time (step S1719: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the ending flag set to on in step S1809 in the opening / closing execution mode control process of FIG. 18 to be described later to off (step S1719: Yes). S1720), the timing of the ending time is finished (step S1721), and the jackpot game end flag is set to on (step S1722). As a result, the MPU 41 can end the ending, that is, the jackpot game. The jackpot end flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 12, and the MPU 41 is in the game state according to the jackpot type when the jackpot end flag is set to ON. Is shifted from the jackpot game state to another game state (in the present embodiment, the probability variation time reduction game state or the normal time reduction game state).

<Step S1723>
In step S1723, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot end command in the RAM 412 and ends the jackpot game control process. The jackpot end command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can end the jackpot game effect on the symbol display unit 341 and the speaker 26 (see steps S2715 and S2716 in FIG. 30 and steps S3215 to S3217 in FIG. 44).

[Open / close execution mode control process]
Here, an example of the open / close execution mode control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1714 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 16 will be described with reference to FIG. In the open / close execution mode control process, as described above, the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is executed a plurality of times according to the jackpot type.

<Step S1801>
In step S1801, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning opening opening flag set to be on in step S1804 of the opening / closing execution mode control process is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning opening 316 is open. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1802 when the variable winning opening opening flag is set to on (step S1801: Yes), and when the variable winning opening opening flag is set to off (step S1801: No). , The process proceeds to step S1810.

<Step S1802>
In step S1802, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the conditions for closing the variable winning opening 316 are satisfied. Specifically, in the MPU 41, has a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the variable winning opening 316 was opened, or has the number of game balls winning in the variable winning opening 316 exceeds the predetermined number (for example, 9)? Judge whether or not. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1803 when the condition for closing the variable winning opening 316 is satisfied (step S1802: Yes), and when the condition for closing the variable winning opening 316 is not satisfied. (Step S1802: No), the opening / closing execution mode control process is terminated.

<Steps S1803 and S1804>
When the condition for closing the variable winning opening 316 is satisfied (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 41 closes the variable winning opening 316 (step S1803) and sets the variable winning opening opening flag to off (step S1803). Step S1804).

<Steps S1805 and S1806>
In step S1805, the MPU 41 subtracts the number of round games R stored in the RAM 412 by 1, and then determines whether or not the number of round games R after the subtraction is "0" (step S1806). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1808 when the subtracted round game number R is "0" (step S1805: Yes), and when the subtracted round game number R is not "0" (step S1806: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1807.

<Step S1807>
When the number of round games R after subtraction is not "0" (step S1806: No), the MPU 41 starts timing the interval time until the next round game is executed (step S1807), and the opening / closing execution mode control process is performed. To finish. The interval time at which timing is started in step S1807 is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1810, which will be described later, in order to determine whether or not to open the variable winning opening 316.

<Steps S1808 and S1809>
When the number of round games R after subtraction is "0" (step S1805: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the open / close execution mode flag to off (step S1808) and further sets the ending flag to on (step S1809). , The opening / closing execution mode control process is terminated. This ending flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1715 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 16 to determine whether to start the ending.

<Step S1810>
When the variable winning opening opening flag is set to off (step S1801: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the interval time at which timing is started in step S1807 exceeds a predetermined predetermined time, that is, ends the interval. Then, it is determined whether or not to start the round game (step S1810). When the interval time exceeds the predetermined time (step S1810: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1811, and when the interval time does not exceed the predetermined time (step S1810: No), the open / close execution mode control process To finish.

<Steps S1811-S1813>
When the interval time exceeds a predetermined time (step S1810: Yes), the MPU 41 opens the variable winning opening 316 (step S1811) and turns on the variable winning opening opening flag indicating whether the variable winning opening 316 is open. Set (step S1812). The variable winning opening opening flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1801 described above. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the round game start command in the RAM 412 (step S1813), and ends the open / close execution mode control process. This round game start command notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the start of the round game (opening the variable winning opening 316) and the round game of the round game. , It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG.

[Processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Next, the process executed by the MPU 51 in the voice lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 46.

In addition, it is considered as another embodiment that a part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 in the present embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. Further, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing of the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, startup processing at the time of starting up the voice lamp control device 5, NMI interrupt processing at the time of power failure, and the like. The description of these processes will be omitted.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51. The MPU 51 executes, for example, the sub-timer interrupt process as a periodic process having a 1 msec cycle.

As shown in FIG. 19, the MPU 51 performs an operation button operation detection process (step S1901), an operation detection pattern determination process (step S1902), a selection button operation detection process (step S1903), and a selection operation detection in the sub-timer interrupt process. Pattern determination process (step S1904), decision button operation detection process (step S1905), decision operation detection pattern determination process (step S1906), counter update process (step S1907), game setting process (step S1908), command determination process (step). S1909), error processing (step S1910), variable game effect processing (step S1911), and jackpot game effect processing (step S1912) are executed.

[Operation button operation detection process]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process (step S1901) in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation detection process, the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times is executed. In the game machine 10, the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, so that the operation button 20 is operated at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in the present embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub-timer interrupt process. It will be judged whether or not there is.

<Steps S2001-S2003>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S2001, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag. Further, in step S2002, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag. After that, in step S2003, the MPU 51 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a in the third detection flag, and the operation detection process ends.

As described above, in the operation button operation detection process, by executing the processes of steps S2001 to S2003, the operation history of the operation button 20 includes the operation states of the most recent three times at 1 msec intervals from the first detection flag to the third detection. It is stored in the RAM 512 as a flag. Specifically, the latest operating state is stored as the third detection flag, the previous operating state is stored as the second detection flag, and the previous operating state is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation detection pattern judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process (step S1902) in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation detection pattern determination process, an operation pattern for determining the operation state for the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. Set the flag. The operation pattern flag includes the first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by the combination of turning on and off the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, as shown in FIG. 22A, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation for the operation button 20 is continued. Further, when only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation for the operation button 20 has started. Further, when only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation for the operation button 20 is completed. Then, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to off, it can be determined that the operation button 20 has not been operated.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 21, in step S2101, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2102 when the first operation detection flag is on (step S2101: Yes), and performs the process when the first operation detection flag is off (step S2101: No). The process proceeds to step S2105.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to ON. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2103 when the second operation detection flag is on (step S2102: Yes), and performs the process when the second operation detection flag is off (step S2102: No). The process proceeds to step S2108.

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is set to ON. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2104 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S2103: Yes), and performs the process when the third operation detection flag is off (step S2103: No). The process proceeds to step S2110.

<Step S2104>
In step S2104, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag on, the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 can determine that the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing when the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. , The first operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 22 (A)). Then, the first operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing.

<Step S2105>
When the MPU 51 determines in step S2101 that the first operation detection flag is off (step S2101: No), whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on. Is determined (step S2105). Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2106 when the second operation detection flag is on (step S2105: Yes), and performs the process when the second operation detection flag is off (step S2105: No). The process proceeds to step S2110.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2107 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S2106: Yes), and performs the process when the third operation detection flag is off (step S2106: No). The process proceeds to step S2110.

<Step S2107>
In step S2107, the MPU 51 sets the second operation pattern flag on, the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, in the MPU 51, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state for three times of the operation button 20, the operation button 20 changes from the non-operation state to the operation state (operation). Is started), so the second operation pattern flag is set to on, and the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 22 (A)). Then, the second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been started). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state by using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state for three times of the operation button 20 is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the operation start of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S2108>
When the MPU 51 determines in step S2102 that the second operation detection flag is off (step S2102: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the latest operation button 20 is on. (Step S2108). Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2110 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S2108: Yes), and performs the process when the second operation detection flag is off (step S2108: No). The process proceeds to step S2109.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 sets the third operation pattern flag on, the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, in the MPU 51, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state for three times of the operation button 20, the operation button 20 changes from the operation state to the non-operation state (operation). Is completed), so the third operation pattern flag is set to on, and the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 22 (A)). Then, the third operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 is completed). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state by using the third operation pattern flag, the operation state for three times of the operation button 20 is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the start of operation of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the end of operation of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S2110>
In step S2110, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 turns off all of the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state for the operation button 20 three times. (See FIG. 22 (A)). The MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 is in a non-operation state when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off.

[Select button operation detection process]
In the selection button operation detection process (step S1903 in FIG. 19), the MPU 51 executes the upper selection button operation process, the lower selection button operation process, the left selection button operation process, and the right selection button operation process.

<Upper selection button operation processing>
In the upper selection button operation process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the upper selection button 211 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the upper selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 20, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the upper selection button operation processing, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "upper selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection processing of FIG.

<Down selection button operation processing>
In the lower selection button operation process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the lower selection button 212 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the lower selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 20, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the lower selection button operation processing, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "lower selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection processing of FIG.

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the left selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 20, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the left selection button operation processing, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "left selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection processing of FIG.

<Right selection button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the right selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 20, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the right selection button operation processing, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "right selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection processing of FIG.

[Selection operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S1904 of FIG. 19), the MPU 51 performs an upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, a lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, a left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and a right selection operation detection pattern determination process. Execute.

<Top selection operation detection pattern judgment processing>
In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 is above the operation history of the upper selection button 211 determined based on the first upper selection operation detection flag, the second upper selection operation detection flag, and the third upper selection operation detection flag. The upper operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for the selection button 211 is set. Here, since the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21, the "operation detection flag" is set to the "upper selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" is set to the "upper selection operation pattern". It should be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 22B, in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 has operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation states for three times of the upper selection button 211. When it occurs, it can be determined that the operation state of the upper selection button 211 is continuing. Therefore, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set. Is set to off. Then, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the upper selection button 211 is continued.

Further, in the MPU 51, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state for three times of the upper selection button 211, the upper selection button 211 changes from the non-operation state to the operation state. Since it can be determined that (the operation has started), the second upper selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the first upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the second upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has been started). It will be used.

Further, in the MPU 51, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state for three times of the upper selection button 211, the upper selection button 211 changes from the operation state to the non-operation state. Since it can be determined that (the operation is completed), the third upper selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the first upper selection operation pattern flag and the second upper selection operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the third upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has been completed). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times. Set all to off. The MPU 51 determines that the upper selection button 211 is in the non-operation state when all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Down selection operation detection pattern judgment processing>
In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines from the operation history of the lower selection button 212, which is determined based on the first lower selection operation detection flag, the second lower selection operation detection flag, and the lower selection operation detection flag. A lower operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 212 is set. Here, since the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21, the "operation detection flag" is set to the "lower selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" is set to the "lower selection operation pattern". It should be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 22C, in the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 has an operation pattern of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation state for three times of the lower selection button 212. When it occurs, it can be determined that the operation state of the lower selection button 212 is continuing. Therefore, the first lower selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set. Is set to off. Then, the first lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the lower selection button 212 continues.

Further, in the MPU 51, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times, the lower selection button 212 changes from the non-operation state to the operation state. Since it can be determined that (the operation has started), the second lower selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the second lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has been started). It will be used.

Further, in the MPU 51, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times, the lower selection button 212 changes from the operation state to the non-operation state. Since it can be determined that (the operation is completed), the third lower selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the third lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has been completed). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the first to third lower selection operation detection flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times. Set all to off. The MPU 51 determines that the lower selection button 212 is in the non-operation state when all of the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Left selection operation detection pattern judgment processing>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines the left selection button from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. A left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 213 is set. Here, since the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21, the "operation detection flag" is set to the "left selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" is set to the "left selection operation pattern". It should be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 22 (D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 has operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" as the operation states for three times of the left selection button 213. When it occurs, it can be determined that the operation state of the left selection button 213 is continuing. Therefore, the first left selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set. Is set to off. Then, the first left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the left selection button 213 is continued.

Further, in the MPU 51, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state for three times of the left selection button 213, the left selection button 213 changes from the non-operation state to the operation state. Since it can be determined that (the operation has started), the second left selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the first left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the second left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has been started). It will be used.

Further, in the MPU 51, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the operation states of the left selection button 213 three times, the left selection button 213 changes from the operation state to the non-operation state. Since it can be determined that (the operation is completed), the third left selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the first left selection operation pattern flag and the second left selection operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has been completed). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the first to third left selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times. Set all to off. The MPU 51 determines that the left selection button 213 is in the non-operation state when all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Right selection operation detection pattern judgment processing>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines from the operation history of the right selection button 214, which is determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. A right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 214 is set. Here, since the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21, the “operation detection flag” is set to the “right selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is set to the “right selection operation pattern”. It should be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 22 (E), in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 has operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" as the operation states for three times of the right selection button 214. If it occurs, it can be determined that the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continuing. Therefore, the first right selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set. Is set to off. Then, the first right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continued.

Further, in the MPU 51, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, the right selection button 214 changes from the non-operation state to the operation state. Since it can be determined that (the operation has started), the second right selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the first right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the second right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has been started). It will be used.

Further, in the MPU 51, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the operation states of the right selection button 214 three times, the right selection button 214 changes from the operation state to the non-operation state. Since it can be determined that (the operation is completed), the third right selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the first right selection operation pattern flag and the second right selection operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the third right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has been completed). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the first to third right selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times. Set all to off. The MPU 51 determines that the right selection button 214 is in the non-operation state when all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are off.

[Enter button operation detection process]
In the decision button operation detection process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the decision button 21B and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the decision button operation detection process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 20, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the decision button operation detection process, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "decision button operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of FIG.

[Decision operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the decision operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines the operation state for the decision button 21B from the operation history of the decision button 21B determined based on the first decision operation detection flag, the second decision operation detection flag, and the third decision operation detection flag. Set the operation pattern flag to determine. Here, since the determination operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "determination operation detection flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22 (F), in the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 generated "ON", "ON", and "ON" operation patterns as the operation states for the determination button 21B three times. In this case, since it can be determined that the operation state of the decision button 21B is continuing, the first decision operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second decision operation pattern flag and the third decision operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the first determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the determination button 21B is continuing.

Further, in the MPU 51, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state for three times of the decision button 21B, the decision button 21B changes from the non-operation state to the operation state (operation). Is started), so the second determination operation pattern flag is set to on, and the first determination operation pattern flag and the third determination operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the second decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the decision button 21B has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the decision button 21B has been started). ..

Further, in the MPU 51, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state for three times of the decision button 21B, the decision button 21B changes from the operation state to the non-operation state (operation). Is completed), so the third determination operation pattern flag is set to on, and the first determination operation pattern flag and the second determination operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the third decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the decision button 21B has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the decision button 21B is completed). ..

Further, the MPU 51 has all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state for three times of the decision button 21B. Is set to off. The MPU 51 determines that the decision button 21B is in the non-operation state when all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags are off.

[Counter update process]
Here, returning to the description of FIG. 19, in the counter update process (step S1907), the MPU 51 updates the effect type counter, the fluctuation display counter, and the scenario type counter. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the effect type counter, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, clears the counter value to 0. The effect type counter updated here is used to determine the variation type and the effect type based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation display counter. This fluctuation display counter is for measuring the fluctuation display time of the symbol display unit 341, and the counter value in the fluctuation display counter is set to be 0 when the remaining fluctuation display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining fluctuation display time, that the fluctuation is in progress, that the fluctuation display of the symbol display unit 341 is completed, and the like. In the present embodiment, for example, in the variation display counter, whether or not the variation display of the main symbol is started in the symbol display unit 341 in step S2301 of FIG. 26, step S2401 of FIG. 27, step S2501 of FIG. 28, and step S2601 of FIG. It is referred to when determining whether. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the scenario type counter, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, clears the counter value to 0. The scenario type counter updated here is used to determine the effect scenario type of the open / close execution mode effect in the jackpot game effect (see step S2805 in FIG. 33). For example, the scenario type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 199.

[Game setting process]
Here, FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting process (step S1908 of FIG. 19). In the game setting process, in the period when the variable game effect and the big hit game effect are not executed, the big hit is made according to the operation of the selection determination unit 21 (the plurality of selection buttons 21A (121 to 214) and the determination button 21B) by the player. Set the game for the game effect and the variable game effect. In the present embodiment, as a game setting, a character setting for selecting a character in a variable game effect from a plurality of characters (selection subjects) will be described. Hereinafter, the character selected by the character setting is referred to as a "selected character" (specific selection subject). The selected character image (selection subject image) 714 for the selected character is a variable game effect and a variable stop state (a variable stop screen described later), except when a specific effect including, for example, a super reach effect and a special reach effect is executed. In 72 (see FIG. 25A)), it is displayed in a part area (for example, lower right corner, lower left corner, lower part, etc.) of the symbol display unit 341. In addition, the selected character image 714 is displayed with priority over other characters in a predetermined effect (for example, cut-in effect, step-up effect, mini character effect), or the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is higher than that of other characters. It may be displayed as a production with a high degree of expectation that it will be a big hit.

Before explaining the game setting process shown in FIG. 23, an example of transition of the display screen in the game setting process will be described first with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. Further, in the following description, for the sake of simplicity, the screen does not shift to the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25 (B)), the demo screen, and the power saving screen, which will be described later, even after a predetermined time has passed from the stop display of the main symbol 715. , The variable stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25A), which will be described later, will be maintained, and the game can be set after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable stop screen 71 was formed. Of course, the game may be set immediately after the variable stop screen 71 is displayed, and when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable stop screen 71 is displayed, the game is automatically set regardless of the player's operation. The display screen may shift from the variable stop screen 71 to the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B).

As shown in FIG. 24, the display screen shifts to at least the variable stop screen 71, the top menu screen 72, the game setting screen 73, and the character selection screen 74 in response to the operation of the selection determination unit 21 by the player, and the first operation is performed. The screen shifts to the variable display screen 75 in which the main symbol 715 is variablely displayed by winning a game ball in the mouth 314 or the second operating port 315.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 (A), when the fluctuation display of the main symbol 715 is stopped, the fluctuation stop screen 71 has a hold number N and a hold number M of "0" and is in a jackpot game state. This is a screen in which the state in which the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 is stopped is maintained when the transition does not occur. In the present embodiment, on the fluctuation stop screen 71, the selected character image 714 is displayed in the lower right corner of the fluctuation stop screen 71. Further, the variable stop screen 71 also shifts to the case where "end" is selected by the player on the top menu screen 72, the game setting screen 73, and the character selection screen 74.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 (B), the top menu screen 72 is a screen that shifts from any of the fluctuation stop screen 71, the game setting screen 73, and the character selection screen 74. Specifically, on the top menu screen 72, for example, when the operation button 20 is operated by the player after a lapse of a predetermined time after the fluctuation stop screen 71 is displayed, the player "returns one" on the game setting screen 73. Is selected, and when "Return to top menu" is selected by the player on the character selection screen 74. The display screen may shift from the variable stop screen 71 to the top menu screen 72 when an operation unit other than the operation button 20 such as the determination button 21B of the selection determination unit 21 is operated.

Here, as shown in FIG. 25B, the top menu screen 72 includes a plurality of selection images 721 to 725, a cursor image 726, and a selection determination unit image 727.

The plurality of selected images 721 to 725 are images showing a plurality of selectable items and allowing the player to select a desired item from the plurality of items. The plurality of selected images 721 to 725 are also images for selecting the display screen of the migration destination. The plurality of selected images 721 to 725 include the selected image 723 of the "game setting customization", the selected image 725 of the "end", and the like. The selection image 723 of the "game setting customization" is for shifting from the top menu screen 72 to the game setting screen 73 (see FIG. 25C) for setting the game in the variable game and the jackpot game (see FIG. 25C). 24). The “end” selected image 725 is for shifting the display screen from the top menu screen 72 to the variable stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25 (A)) (see FIG. 24).

The cursor image 726 is an image showing a temporarily selected item. Further, the temporarily selected selected image (in FIG. 25B, the selected image 723 of the "game setting customization") is another selected image 721, 722, 724, in order to emphasize that the tentatively selected image is selected. It is displayed in a manner distinguishable from 725.

The selection determination unit image 727 is an image that imitates the selection determination unit 21 (see FIG. 1), and is an image showing that a desired item can be selected from a plurality of items by operating the selection determination unit 21. In the selection determination unit image 727, the characters "select" are attached to the images corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212, and the images corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 are emphasized. Is displayed. Further, the images corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 may be emphasized by blinking display or the like. Further, in the selection determination unit image 727, the character "decision" is attached to the image corresponding to the determination button 21B, indicating that the determination button 21B should be operated when the tentatively selected item is selected. The display example of the selection determination unit image 727 is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 25 (B), and can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 (C), the game setting screen 73 is a screen that shifts from the top menu screen 72 or the character selection screen 74. Specifically, the game setting screen 73 shifts to the case where "game setting customization" is selected by the player on the top menu screen 72 and the case where "back one" is selected by the player on the character selection screen 74. To do.

Here, as shown in FIG. 25C, the game setting screen 73 includes a plurality of selection images 731 to 735, a cursor image 726, and a selection determination unit image 727. Since the cursor image 726 and the selection determination unit image 727 are the same as in the case of the top menu screen 72, the description thereof will be omitted. Also in the following, when the same is true for the cursor image 726 and the selection determination unit image 727 on the top menu screen 72, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted. The plurality of selected images 731 to 735 are images for showing a plurality of selectable items (display screens of the transition destination) and forcing the player to select a desired item from the plurality of items. The plurality of selected images 731 to 735 include the selected image 733 of "character selection", the selected image 734 of "back one", and the selected image 735 of "end".

The selection image 733 of the “character selection” is a character selection screen 74 (FIG. 25 (D)) for selecting a selection character image 714 (see FIG. 25 (A)) in the variable game effect from the game setting screen 73 on the display screen. ) (See FIG. 24). The selected image 734 of "back one" shifts the display screen from the game setting screen 73 to the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25 (B)) (see FIG. 24). The “end” selected image 735 is for shifting the display screen from the game setting screen 73 to the variable stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25 (A)) (see FIG. 24).

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 (D), the character selection screen 74 is a screen that shifts from the game setting screen 73. Specifically, the game setting screen 73 shifts to the case where "character selection" is selected by the player on the game setting screen 73.

Here, as shown in FIG. 25 (D), the character selection screen 74 includes a plurality of selection images 741 to 748, a provisional selection frame image 749, and a selection determination unit image 727. The plurality of selected images 741 to 748 include a plurality of character selected images 741 to 745, a selected image 746 of "return by one", a selected image 747 of "return to the top menu", and a selected image 748 of "finished".

The plurality of character selection images 741 to 745 are images that allow the player to select the selection character to be displayed as the selection character image 714 (see FIG. 25A). In the present embodiment, 20 characters (characters 1 to 20) are prepared for the variable game effect and the jackpot game effect, and 9 of them (characters 1 to 9) are selected by the player. Can be displayed as a selected character image 714 (see FIG. 25 (A)). Of course, the selected character to be displayed as the selected character image 714 (see FIG. 25 (A)) may be selected from all the characters prepared for the variable game effect and the jackpot game effect.

Further, on the character selection screen 74, five characters out of nine selectable characters are displayed at the same time, the character arranged in the center is displayed in the largest size, and the character is displayed smaller as the distance from the center increases. .. These five characters are changed by scrolling characters 1 to 9 left and right by operating the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214. Of course, the number of characters displayed on the character selection screen 74 at the same time is not limited to five, and any number of characters may be displayed as long as it is one or more, and all selectable characters may be displayed at the same time. Further, when displaying a plurality of characters at the same time on the character selection screen 74, all the characters may be displayed in the same size.

The temporary selection frame image 749 is an image indicating that the character can be selected by operating the enter button 21B, and is displayed so as to surround the character selection image. In FIG. 25 (D), the character 1 displayed in the center is the tentatively selected character. The display position of the temporary selection frame image 749 is fixed, and the position is not changed by the operation of the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214. When displaying a plurality of characters at the same size on the character selection screen 74 at the same time, the temporary selection frame image 749 may be moved by an operation on the selection button 213, the right selection button 214, or the like.

The selection image 746 of "back one" shifts the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the game setting screen 73 (see FIG. 25C) (see FIG. 24). The selected image 747 of "return to the top menu" shifts the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B) (see FIG. 24). The “end” selected image 748 is for shifting the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the variable stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25 (A)) (see FIG. 24).

<Step S2201>
Returning to the description of FIG. 23, in step S2201 in the game setting process, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the variable stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25 (A)). Specifically, the MPU 51 is set to ON when the value of the fluctuation display counter updated in the counter update process of step S1907 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 19 is 0, and is set to ON when the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. Variable stop screen display set to ON in step S2407 in top menu screen processing, step S2511 in game setting screen processing in FIG. 28 described later, or step S2612 in character selection screen processing in FIG. 29 described later. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen 71 depending on whether or not the flag is on.

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2202 when the display screen is the variable stop screen 71 (step S2201: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2203 when the display screen is not the variable stop screen 92 (step S2201: No). To do.

<Step S2202>
In step S2202, the MPU 51 executes the game start standby process and ends the game setting process. The details of the game start waiting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2203>
In step S2203, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B). Specifically, the MPU 51 is the top menu screen of step S2304 of the game start standby process of FIG. 26 described later, step S2509 of the game setting screen process of FIG. 28 described later, or step S2611 of the character selection screen process of FIG. 29 described later. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the top menu screen 72 based on whether or not the top menu screen display flag set to be on in the migration process is on. When the display screen is the top menu screen 72 (step S2203: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2204, and when the display screen is not the top menu screen 72 (step S2203: No), the process shifts to step S2205.

<Step S2204>
In step S2204, the MPU 51 executes the top menu screen process and ends the game setting process. The top menu screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

<Step S2205>
In step S2205, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 25C). Specifically, the MPU 51 is a game setting screen display flag set to be turned on in the game setting screen transition process of the top menu screen processing step S2409 of FIG. 27, which will be described later, or the character selection screen processing step S2609 of FIG. 29, which will be described later. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the game setting screen 73 based on whether or not is on. When the display screen is the game setting screen 73 (step S2205: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2206, and when the display screen is not the game setting screen 73 (step S2205: No), the process shifts to step S2207. To do.

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 51 executes the game setting screen process and ends the game setting process. The details of the game setting screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

<Step S2207>
In step S2207, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the character selection screen 74 (see FIG. 25 (D)). Specifically, the display screen of the MPU 51 is displayed based on whether or not the character selection screen display flag set to be on in the character selection screen transition process of step S2507 of the game setting process of FIG. 28, which will be described later, is on. It is determined whether or not the character selection screen 74 is displayed. When the display screen is the character selection screen 74 (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2208, and when the display screen is not the character selection screen 74 (step S2207: No), the process shifts to step S2209. To do.

<Step S2208>
In step S2208, the MPU 51 executes the character selection screen process and ends the game setting process. The details of the character selection screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

<Step S2209>
In step S2209, if the display screen is neither the variable stop screen 71, the top menu screen 72, the game setting screen 73, or the character selection screen 74, the MPU 51 executes another process corresponding to the current display screen, and the game End the setting process.

[Game start waiting process]
Here, FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game start waiting process executed in step S2202 of the game setting process of FIG. 23. In the game start standby process, a process of shifting the display screen from the variable stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25 (A)) to the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25 (B)) in response to the operation of the player's operation button 20 is performed. Will be executed.

<Step S2301>
In step S2301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has started in the symbol display unit 341. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol has started based on whether or not the counter value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. The MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has started when the value of the fluctuation display counter is not 0.

When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has started (step S2301: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the game start waiting process and determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has not started (step S2301: No). ), The process proceeds to step S2302.

<Step S2302>
In step S2302, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated by the player based on the first to third operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22A). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 has been operated (step S2302: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2303, and when it determines that the operation button 20 has not been operated (step S2302: No), the game starts. End the standby process.

<Step S2303>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a predetermined predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed since the transition to the fluctuation stop screen 71. For example, when the fluctuation stop screen 71 is displayed (when the counter value of the fluctuation display counter becomes 0), the MPU 51 starts counting by the timing counter and stops fluctuation by referring to the counter value of the timing counter. It is possible to grasp the time since the screen 71 is displayed.

When the MPU 51 determines that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S2303: Yes), the process shifts to step S2304, and when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S2303: No), the game start waiting process To finish.

<Step S2304>
In step S2304, since the MPU 51 can determine that the operation button 20 has been operated after a predetermined time after the transition to the fluctuation stop screen 71 (Yes in steps S2302 and S2303), the MPU 51 responds to the operation of the operation button 20 by the player. The display screen is changed from the variable stop screen 71 to the top menu screen 72. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to on.

[Top menu screen processing]
Here, FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the top menu screen processing executed in step S2204 of the game setting processing of FIG. 23. In the top menu screen processing, a screen corresponding to an item selected by an operation on the selection determination unit 21 by the player from a plurality of selection images 721 to 725 displayed on the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B), for example, a game A process of shifting the display screen to the setting screen 73 (see FIG. 25C) is executed.

<Step S2401>
In step S2401, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has been started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has started (step S2401: Yes), the process shifts to step S2402, and when it determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has not started (step S2401: No). , The process proceeds to step S2403.

<Step S2402>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 is started (step S2401: Yes), the top menu screen display flag is set to off (step S2402), and the top menu screen processing is terminated.

<Step S2403>
In step S2403, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 is moved up based on the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22B) and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22C). It is determined whether or not the selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

When the MPU 51 determines that the operation for the selection button 21A has been performed (step S2403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2404, and when it is determined that the operation for the selection button 21A has not been performed (step S2403: No), the process To step S2405.

<Step S2404>
When it is determined that the operation for the selection button 21A has been performed (step S2403: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a temporary selection display change process for changing the temporary selection display on the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B) (step S2404). ). For example, the MPU 51 raises the cursor image 726 by one above the selected image 723 when the upper selection button 211 is operated while the selected image 723 of the "game setting customization" shown in FIG. 25 (B) is temporarily selected. Move to the side of the selected image 722. At this time, the temporary selection display indicating that the selected image 723 is temporarily selected is changed to the normal display, while the selected image 722 is changed from the normal display to the temporary selection display. On the other hand, in the MPU 51, when the lower selection button 212 is operated while the selection image 723 of "game setting customization" is temporarily selected, the cursor image 726 is placed on the side of the selection image 724 one level below the selection image 723. The selected image 723 is moved and changed from the temporary selection display to the normal display, while the selected image 724 is changed from the normal display to the temporary selection display. When the process of step S2404 is completed, the MPU 51 ends the top menu screen process.

The MPU 51 temporarily selects the cursor image 726 and the selected images 721 to 725 even if the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214 is operated when the display screen is the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B). Processing such as moving the display is not executed.

<Step S2405>
In step S2405, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the decision button 21B. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the determination button 21B has been operated by the player based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22F).

When the MPU 51 determines that the operation for the decision button 21B has been performed (step S2405: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2406, and when it is determined that the operation for the selection button 21A has not been performed (step S2405: No), the said End the top menu screen processing.

<Step S2406>
In step S2406, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the "end" selection image 725 (see FIG. 25B) on the top menu screen 72 has been selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "end". When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 725 of "end" is selected (step S2406: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2407, and when it is determined that the selected image 725 of "end" is not selected (step S2406: Yes). S2406: No), the process proceeds to step S2408.

<Step S2407>
When it is determined that the selected image 725 of "End" is selected (step S2406: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25 (B)) to the variable stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25 (A)). ) Is executed (step S2407). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to off, while setting the fluctuation stop screen display flag to on, and ends the top menu screen processing.

<Step S2408>
In step S2408, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 723 (see FIG. 25B) of the "game setting customization" on the top menu screen 72 is selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "game setting customization". When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 723 of the "game setting customization" is selected (step S2408: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2409 and determines that the selected image 723 of the "game setting customization" is not selected. If so (step S2408: No), the process proceeds to step S2410.

<Step S2409>
When it is determined that the selected image 723 of the "game setting customization" is selected (step S2408: Yes), the MPU 51 displays the display screen from the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25 (B)) to the game setting screen 73 (FIG. 25 (C)). ) Is executed (step S2409). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to off, while setting the game setting screen display flag to on, and ends the top menu screen processing.

<Step S2410>
In step S2410, the MPU 51 shifts to the display screen corresponding to the item selected by the player when the item selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B is other than "end" and "customize game setting". .. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to off.

[Game setting screen processing]
Here, FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting screen process executed in step S2206 of the game setting process of FIG. 23. In the game setting screen processing, as shown in FIG. 24, the character selection screen 74 (FIG. 25 (D)) is displayed from the game setting screen 73 (see FIG. 25 (C)) in response to the operation of the selection determination unit 21 by the player. (See), the process of shifting the display screen to the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B) and the like is executed.

<Step S2501>
In step S2501 of FIG. 28, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 is started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the counter value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has started (step S2501: Yes), the process shifts to step S2502, and when it determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has not started (step S2501: No). , The process proceeds to step S2503.

<Step S2502>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 is started (step S2501: Yes), the game setting screen display flag is set to off (step S2502), and the game setting screen process is terminated.

<Step S2503>
In step S2503, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 is moved up based on the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22B) and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22C). It is determined whether or not the selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

When the MPU 51 determines that the operation for the selection button 21A has been performed (step S2503: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2504, and when it is determined that the operation for the selection button 21A has not been performed (step S2503: No), the process To step S2505.

<Step S2504>
In step S2504, in the MPU 51, as in the provisional selection display change processing of step S2404 in the top menu screen processing of FIG. 27, whether the operated selection button 21A is either the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212. The temporary selection display change process for moving the cursor image 726 and the temporary selection display up or down by one is executed on the game setting screen 94 accordingly. When the process of step S2504 is completed, the MPU 51 ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S2505>
In step S2505, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22F). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation for the decision button 21B has been performed (step S2505: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2506, and when it is determined that the operation for the decision button 21B has not been performed (step S2505: No), the said End the game setting screen processing.

<Step S2506>
In step S2506, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 733 (see FIG. 25C) of the "character selection" on the game setting screen 73 is selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "character selection". When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 733 of the "character selection" has been selected (step S2506: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2507 and determines that the selected image 733 of the "character selection" has not been selected. (Step S2506: No), the process shifts to step S2508.

<Step S2507>
When it is determined that the selected image 733 of the "character selection" is selected (step S2506: Yes), the MPU 51 displays the display screen from the game setting screen 73 (see FIG. 25C) to the character selection screen 74 (FIG. 25 (D)). )) Is executed (step S2507). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to off, while setting the setting item selection screen display flag to on, and ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S2508>
In step S2508, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 734 of "return to one" on the game setting screen 73 is selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "return to one". When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 734 of "return to one" is selected (step S2508: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2509, and the selected image 734 of "return to one" is not selected. If it is determined (step S2508: No), the process proceeds to step S2510.

<Step S2509>
When it is determined that the selected image 734 of "return to one" is selected (step S2508: Yes), the MPU 51 displays the display screen from the game setting screen 73 (see FIG. 25C) to the top menu screen 72 (FIG. 25 (C)). B) The top menu screen transition process for transitioning to) is executed (step S2509). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to off, while setting the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S2510>
In step S2510, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the "end" selection image 735 on the game setting screen 73 is selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "end". When the MPU 51 determines that the "finished" selected image 735 is selected (step S2510: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2511, and when it is determined that the "finished" selected image 735 is not selected (step S2510: Yes). S2510: No), the process proceeds to step S2512.

<Step S2511>
When it is determined that the selected image 735 of "End" is selected (step S2510: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the game setting screen 73 (see FIG. 25 (C)) to the variable stop screen 71 (FIG. 25 (A)). (See), the variable stop screen transition process is executed (step S2511). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to off, while setting the variable stop screen display flag to on, and ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S2512>
In step S2512, the MPU 51 corresponds to the item selected by the player when the item selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B is other than "character selection", "back one", and "end". Move to the display screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to off.

[Character selection process]
Here, FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the character selection process executed in step S2208 of the game setting process of FIG. 23. In the character selection process, a process of determining a selected character (a selected character to be displayed as a selected character image 714 (see FIG. 25A)) selected by an operation on the selection determination unit 21 by the player is executed from a plurality of characters. Further, a process of shifting the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the variable stop screen 71 or the top menu screen 72 is executed according to the item selected by the player.

<Step S2601>
In step S2601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has been started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the counter value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has started (step S2601: Yes), the process shifts to step S2602, and when it determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has not started (step S2601: No). , The process proceeds to step S2603.

<Step S2602>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 is started (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to off (step S2602), and ends the character selection screen processing.

<Step S2603>
In step S2603, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a first to third upper selection operation pattern flag, a first to third lower selection operation pattern flag, a first to third left selection operation pattern flag, and a first to third right selection operation pattern. Based on the flags (see FIGS. 22B to 22E), it is determined whether or not the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player. ..

When the MPU 51 determines that the operation for the selection button 21A has been performed (step S2603: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2604, and when it is determined that the operation for the selection button 21A has not been performed (step S2603: No), the process To step S2605.

<Step S2604>
When it is determined that the operation for the selection button 21A has been performed (step S2603: Yes), in the MPU 51, the operated selection button 21A is among the up selection button 211, the down selection button 212, the left selection button 213 and the right selection button 214. A temporary selection display change process for moving the temporary selection display is executed according to which one is used (step S2604). For example, when the upper selection button 211 is operated while the character selection image 741 is temporarily selected, the "end" selection image 748 is changed to the temporary selection display. When the lower selection button 212 is operated, the selection image 746 of "back one" is changed to the temporary selection display. When the left selection button 213 is operated, the character selection images 741 to 745 are scrolled to the right one by one, and the selection image 743 of the character 9 is moved to the center to change the temporary selection display. On the contrary, when the right selection button 214 is operated, the character selection images 714 to 745 are scrolled to the left one by one, and the character 2 selection image 742 is moved to the center to change the temporary selection display. To do. When the process of step S2604 is completed, the MPU 51 ends the character selection screen process.

<Step S2605>
In step S2605, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22F). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation for the decision button 21B has been performed (step S2605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2606, and when it is determined that the operation for the decision button 21B has not been performed (step S2605: No), the said The character selection screen processing ends.

<Step S2606>
In step S2606, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the character selection image 741 has been selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the character selection image 741 is tentatively selected when the decision button 21B is operated. When the MPU 51 determines that the character selection image 741 has been selected (step S2606: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2607, and when it determines that the character selection image 741 has not been selected (step S2606: No), the process To step S2608.

<Step S2607>
When it is determined that the character selection image 741 is selected (step S2606: Yes), the MPU 51 selects a character corresponding to the character selection image 741 that was temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated. Character image 714 (FIG. FIG. 25 (see (A))), the character determination process for determining as the selected character to be displayed is executed (step S2607), and the character selection screen process is terminated.

Specifically, the MPU 51 updates the information about the selected character stored in the RAM 512. For example, when the RAM 512 stores that the selected character is the character 2, and the character 1 is determined as the selected character in the step S2607, the information indicating that the selected character is the character 1 is stored in the RAM 512. Rewrite the contents that have been done.

In the embodiment, the display screen is not transferred from the character selection screen 74 to another screen such as the top menu screen 72 even when the character determination process is performed, but the display screen is changed to a character when the character determination process is performed. The selection screen 74 may be transferred to another screen such as the top menu screen 72.

<Step S2608>
In step S2608, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected image 746 of "back by one" is selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "return by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 746 of "back one" is selected (step S2608: Yes), the process shifts to step S2609 and determines that the selected image 746 of "back one" is not selected. If so (step S2608: No), the process proceeds to step S2610.

<Step S2609>
When it is determined that the selected image 746 of "back by one" is selected (step S2608: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a game setting screen transition process of shifting the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the game setting screen 73 (step S2608: Yes). Step S2609). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the character selection screen display flag to off, while setting the game setting screen display flag to on, and ends the character selection screen processing.

<Step S2610>
In step S2610, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected image 747 of "return to the top menu" is selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return to the top menu". When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 747 of "return to the top menu" is selected (step S2610: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2611 and determines that the selected image 747 of "return to the top menu" is not selected. If so (step S2610: No), the process proceeds to step S2612.

<Step S2611>
When it is determined that the selected image 747 of "return to the top menu" is selected (step S2610: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen transition process of shifting the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the top menu screen 72 (step S2611). ). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the character selection screen display flag to off, while setting the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the character selection screen processing.

<Step S2612>
According to the MPU 51, when the character selection image is not selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B and the selected items are other than "return by one" and "return to the top menu", "end" is selected. Since it can be determined, the variable stop screen transition process for shifting the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the variable stop screen 71 is executed (step S2612), and the character selection screen process is terminated. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the character selection screen display flag to off, while setting the fluctuation stop screen display flag to on.

[Command judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S1909 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. In the command determination process, a command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed.

<Step S2701>
As shown in FIG. 30, in step S2701, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives the command (step S2701: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2702. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received the command (step S2701: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. The command received from the main control device 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. The command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have received the command in step S2701, and is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when it is targeted for processing. For example, in the processing work storage area. Will be remembered.

<Step S2702>
In step S2702, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a variation pattern command. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2703 when it is a variable pattern command (step S2702: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2706 when the command is not a variable pattern command (step S2702: No).

<Step S2703>
In step S2703, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (combination of stop symbols of the main symbol, variation type, and effect type) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a variation pattern command, a first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 31 (A)), a variation type table (see FIG. 31 (B)), and an effect type table (see FIG. 31 (B)) stored in ROM 511 in advance. The fluctuation pattern is determined based on (see FIGS. 32 (A) to 32 (C)) and the counter value of the effect type counter stored in the RAM 512. Further, when the variation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag according to the jackpot type to on. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag on when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot, and sets the 5R probability variable jackpot flag on when the jackpot type is a 5R probability variable jackpot, and sets the jackpot type to on. Set the 16R probability variation jackpot flag to on when is a 16R probability variation jackpot.

The stop symbol combination of the main symbol consists of a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol, and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is the main symbol that is first stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the second stop symbol is the second main symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the final stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed. It is a design. The production type table includes a normal reach production table corresponding to normal reach (see FIG. 32 (A)), a super reach production table corresponding to super reach (see FIG. 32 (B)), and a special reach production table corresponding to special reach (see FIG. 32 (B)). (See FIG. 32 (C)).

Here, FIG. 31A is a diagram showing an example of a first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 31 (A), in the first stop symbol selection table, the main symbol (first stop symbol) to be first stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is defined. In addition, FIG. 31 (A) shows a symbol combination, "777", indicating that the main symbols are "1" to "9" and "333" is a probability variation jackpot (either 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot). Is a symbol combination indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and that the doublet other than "333" and "777" is a symbol combination indicating that it is either a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variation jackpot, or a 16R probability variation jackpot. It is assumed.

When the lottery result of the jackpot lottery by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 is "5R normal jackpot", there is no distribution of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbol, and from the main symbols other than "3" and "7". The first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability. That is, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the symbol combination of "333" or "777" indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", "7" is not sorted as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined from the main symbols other than "7" with a predetermined probability. That is, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the symbol combination of "777" indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot is not stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", doublet symbol combinations other than the symbol combination of "333" indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot may be stopped and displayed. That is, even when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the doublet symbol combination other than the symbol combination of "333" whose stop display result of the main symbol suggests a 5R normal jackpot can be stopped and displayed. Then, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" and a main symbol other than "3" excluding "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 sets the first promotion effect flag to on. .. The first promotion effect flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the probability variation promotion effect that clearly indicates that the 5R probability variation jackpot is in the state suggesting that the 5R normal jackpot is (visual inhibition in FIG. 36). Step S2901 in the effect determination process).

Furthermore, if the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", there is a distribution for all the main symbols of "1" to "9", and the first stop is made with a predetermined probability from the main symbols of "1" to "9". The design is decided. That is, even when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", doublet symbol combinations other than the symbol combination of "777" indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", the doublet symbol combination other than the symbol combination of "777" which suggests the 5R probability variation jackpot or the 5R normal jackpot is stopped and displayed as the stop display result of the main symbol. Can be done. Then, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" and "3" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 sets the second promotion effect flag to on and "3" as the first stop symbol. When a main symbol other than "7" is determined, the MPU 51 sets the third promotion effect flag to ON. The second promotion effect flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the 16R promotion effect that clearly indicates that the 16R probability variation jackpot is in the state suggesting that the 5R probability variation jackpot is (visual inhibition in FIG. 36). Step S2901 in the effect determination process). The third promotion effect flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the probability variation promotion effect that clearly indicates that the 16R probability variation jackpot is in the state suggesting that the 5R normal jackpot is (visual inhibition in FIG. 36). Step S2901 in the production determination process).

Then, when the first stop symbol is determined when the lottery result is a big hit, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbols as the previously determined first stop symbol. As a result, the stop symbol combination that is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the symbol display unit 341 is determined in the variable game.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is "missing", there is a distribution for all the main symbols "1" to "9", and the first stop symbol is determined from the main symbols "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. Will be done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is "out", the out-of-order type selected based on the out-of-type table (see FIG. 8 (D)) and the first determined in advance. The second stop symbol is determined based on the stop symbol. For example, when the deviation type is front-back deviation reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. Further, when the detachment type is reach other than the front-rear deviation, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the symbols before and after the first stop symbol and the first stop symbol. It is decided by the design. When the deviation type is completely out, the second stop symbol is determined to be a symbol different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. The stop symbol combination of the main symbol may be determined by the display control device 6, only the first stop symbol is determined by the voice lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined by the display control device 6. You may decide.

Further, FIG. 31B is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table. As shown in FIG. 31 (B), in the variation type table, the variation display time and the contents of the variation type corresponding to the variation pattern command are defined. For example, the fluctuation pattern command "A01" whose lottery result is "normal jackpot" and whose fluctuation pattern is "01" is associated with a fluctuation display time "30s" and a fluctuation type "normal reach". Further, the fluctuation pattern command "B02" whose lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" and whose variation pattern is "02" is associated with the variation display time "60s" and the variation type "super reach". The fluctuation pattern command "C03" whose result is "16R probability variation jackpot" and whose variation pattern is "03" is associated with the variation display time "90s" and the variation type "special reach". Further, the fluctuation pattern command "D04" in which the lottery result is "off" and the fluctuation pattern is "04" is associated with the fluctuation display time "7s" and the fluctuation type "no reach", and the lottery result is obtained. The fluctuation pattern command "D05", which is "off" and the fluctuation pattern is "05", is associated with the fluctuation display time "10s" and the fluctuation type "no reach".

Further, FIGS. 32 (A) to 32 (C) are diagrams showing an example of the effect type table. The production type table is defined for each variable type. FIG. 32 (A) is a normal reach effect table when the variation type is normal reach, FIG. 32 (B) is a super reach effect table when the variation type is super reach, and FIG. 32 (C) is a super reach effect table. This is a special reach production table when the variation type is special reach. In the present embodiment, a case where there are five types of effects corresponding to each of the variable types will be described as an example, but there may be six or more types of effects. Further, in FIG. 32, the effect type table when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach production table shown in FIG. 32 (A), "Production X1" is used as the production type corresponding to the counter value of the production type counter according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and deviation). ~ "Direction X5" is defined. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is the normal reach, the MPU 51 selects the effect type corresponding to the counter value of the effect type counter from the normal reach effect table according to the lottery result.

Further, in the super reach effect table shown in FIG. 32 (B), "effect Y1" to "effect Y5" are defined as the effect types corresponding to the counter values of the effect type counters according to the lottery result. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is super reach, the MPU 51 selects an effect type corresponding to the counter value of the effect type counter from the super reach effect table according to the lottery result.

Further, in the special reach effect table shown in FIG. 32 (C), "effect Z1" to "effect Z5" are defined as the effect types corresponding to the counter values of the effect type counters according to the lottery result. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is the special reach, the MPU 51 selects the effect type corresponding to the counter value of the effect type counter from the special reach effect table according to the lottery result.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the RAM 512 with a stop symbol combination of the main symbols determined based on the variation pattern command, the variation type table, the effect type table, and the effect type counter, and a display variation pattern command indicating the variation type and the effect type. This display variation pattern command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S2705 described later. On the other hand, the display control device 6 that has received the display variation pattern command executes the symbol variation display and the effect display using the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command. The display fluctuation pattern command may include information on whether or not a jackpot has been won.

<Step S2704>
Returning to the description of FIG. 30, in step S2704, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command in the variation display counter. The fluctuation display time is determined according to the fluctuation pattern information included in the fluctuation pattern command. Then, the fluctuation display counter is decremented one by one in the counter update processing of step S1907 in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 19, and the MPU 51 performs fluctuation display based on the fluctuation display counter to determine whether or not the symbol fluctuation display is in progress. It is possible to determine the remaining time of time. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display has ended when the count value of the variation display counter becomes 0.

<Step S2705>
In step S2705, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command for specifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbol in the symbol display unit 341, the variation type, and the content of the effect type to the display control device 6, and ends the command determination process. Let me. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination, variation type, and effect type of the main symbol determined in step S2703. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores a variation image and an effect image of the main symbol corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the effect display on the symbol display unit 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the main symbol corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type, and the effect type.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the variation display of a plurality of main symbols (three in the present embodiment) until the preset variation display time elapses. Then, the fluctuations of a plurality of main symbols are stopped and displayed in order. Then, when all the main symbols are stopped and displayed and the result of the jackpot lottery is displayed, the symbol variation display of the next variable game or the process corresponding to the jackpot game is executed. Here, during the variation display of the main symbol, the effect corresponding to the content of the variation type and the effect type specified by the display variation pattern command is executed.

<Step S2706>
In step S2706, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game start command. The jackpot game start command is a command indicating to start the jackpot game, and is set when the jackpot game execution flag is set to on at the start of the jackpot game by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 as described above. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2707 when the received command is the jackpot game start command (step S2706: Yes), and processes when the received command is not the jackpot game start command (step S2706: No). To step S2709.

<Step S2707>
When the jackpot game start command is received (step S2706: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the jackpot game effect determination process (step S2707). The jackpot game effect determination process is a process for determining an effect to be executed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state. The details of the jackpot game effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33.

<Step S2708>
In step S2708, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to on when the jackpot game effect determination process is completed, and ends the command determination process. The jackpot game effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the opening effect start process in step S3202 of the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 44, which will be described later.

<Step S2709>
In step S2709, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the start of the round game and the round number of the round game in the open / close execution mode in the jackpot game. FIG. It is set in step S1813 of the opening / closing execution mode control process of. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2710 when the received command is a round game start command (step S2709: Yes), and processes when the received command is not a round game start command (step S2709: No). To step S2711.

<Step S2710>
In step S2710, the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to on. At this time, the MPU 51 specifies the number of rounds of the round game to be started from the information about the number of rounds of the round game included in the round game start command, stores the number of rounds in the RAM 512, and ends the command determination process. To do. The round game effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the round game effect process in step S3209 in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 44, which will be described later. Further, the number of rounds of the round game stored in the RAM 512 in step S2710 is referred to when determining whether or not there is an undigested round game in step S3016 in the error processing of FIG. 42 described later.

<Step S2711>
In step S2711, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a variable winning opening winning command. The variable winning opening winning command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game ball has won the variable winning opening 316, and when the game ball wins the variable winning opening 316, the winning ball command setting process ( It is set in step S1303) of FIG. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2712 when the received command is a variable winning opening winning command (step S2711: Yes), and when the received command is not a variable winning opening winning command (step S2711: No). , The process proceeds to step S2713.

<Step S2712>
In step S2712, the MPU 51 executes the payout counting process. In this payout counting process, the cumulative number of winnings for the variable winning opening 316 in the jackpot consecutive villa is counted and stored. Specifically, the MPU 51 counts the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls (for example, 13) for winning the variable winning opening 316 each time the variable winning opening winning command is received, and stores the cumulative number of balls in the RAM 512 as the cumulative number of balls to be ejected. Remember. The cumulative number of balls stored in the RAM 512 is cleared after the jackpot consecutive villa is completed. Further, the payout counting process may be a process of counting the cumulative value of the winning number of the game balls to the variable winning opening 316 and storing it in the RAM 512 without directly counting the cumulative number of payouts. Further, the ball ejection counting process may be a process of counting the so-called difference ball number, which is the difference between the cumulative ball ejection number at the time of big hit and the number of launched game balls (out ball number) at the time of big hit game. The number of difference balls may be not only the number of launching game balls during the jackpot game, but also the number of launching game balls in the probabilistic time saving mode that shifts after the jackpot game. In addition, the ball payout counting process counts not only the cumulative number of balls to be paid out with respect to the number of prize balls of the variable winning opening 316, but also the cumulative number of balls to be paid out by adding the number of winning balls from other winning openings such as the general winning opening 313. It may be a process.

Here, the term "big hit consecutive villa" means, for example, that the lottery result of the big hit lottery for a variable game becomes a big hit in a normal non-time-saving game state (a state in which a low probability mode is not a high-frequency support mode). Includes all jackpots until the player falls into a non-short game state, and the first hit is also included in the jackpot villa. In addition, the jackpot consecutive villa can be defined as all jackpots until the gaming state falls to the normal time-saving gaming state.

In the ball payout counting process in step S2712, the cumulative number of payouts may be counted as the sum of the payouts for the prizes in the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, and the second operating opening 315. In this case, the cumulative number of balls to be ejected may be counted only during the jackpot game, or may be counted from the probabilistic game state and the normal time-shortened game state in addition to the jackpot game.

<Step S2713>
In step S2713, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is the ending start command. The ending start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the ending has started, that is, the opening / closing execution mode has ended, and when the ending is started, in step S1718 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. Set. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2714 when the received command is the ending start command (step S2713: Yes), and steps the process when the received command is not the ending start command (step S2713: No). Move to S2715.

<Step S2714>
In step S2714, the MPU 51 sets the ending start flag to on and ends the command determination process. The ending effect start flag is referred to when it is determined whether or not to execute the ending effect start process in step S3212 in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 44, which will be described later.

<Step S2715>
In step S2715, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is terminated, and is set when the jackpot game execution flag is set to off at the end of the jackpot game by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 as described above. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2716 when the received command is the jackpot game end command (step S2715: Yes), and processes when the received command is not the jackpot game end command (step S2715: No). To step S2717.

<Step S2716>
In step S2716, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to on and ends the command determination process. The jackpot game effect end flag is referred to when it is determined whether or not to execute the ending effect end process in step S3315 of the jackpot game effect in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 44, which will be described later.

<Step S2717>
In step S2717, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a hold command. The hold command includes a first hold command and a second hold command as described above. The first hold command includes information that identifies the jackpot type or miss, the fluctuation pattern, and the number N of hold numbers N of the fluctuation display generated by winning the first operating port 314. The second hold command includes information that identifies the jackpot type or miss, the fluctuation pattern, and the hold number M of the fluctuation display generated by winning the second operating port 315. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2718 when the received command is a hold command (step S2717: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2719 when the received command is not a hold command (step S2717: No). Transition.

<Step S2718>
In step S2718, when the received hold command is the first hold command, the MPU 51 stores the jackpot type or loss, the fluctuation pattern, the number of holds N, and the like specified by the first hold command in the fluctuation type area of the RAM 512. .. Similarly, when the received hold command is the second hold command, the MPU 51 stores the jackpot type or deviation, the fluctuation pattern, the number of holds M, and the like specified by the second hold command in the fluctuation type area of the RAM 512. After executing this step S2718, the MPU 51 ends the command determination process.

<Step S2719>
In step S2719, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is an error occurrence command. The error occurrence command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that an error has occurred, and when an error occurs, the error determination process (step S1007) of FIG. 9 is performed as an error generation command according to the type of error. ) Is set. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2720 when the received command is an error occurrence command (step S2719: Yes), and steps the process when the received command is not an error occurrence command (step S2719: No). Move to S2721.

<Step S2720>
In step S2720, the MPU 51 sets the error occurrence flag to on and ends the command determination process. The error occurrence flag is referred to when determining whether or not to display an error in step S3001 in the error processing of FIG. 41 described later.

<Step S2721>
In step S2721, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is an error resolution command. The error resolution command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the error has been resolved, and when the error is resolved, the error determination process (step S1007) of FIG. 9 is performed as an error resolution command according to the type of error. ) Is set. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2722 when the received command is an error resolution command (step S2721: Yes), and steps the process when the received command is not an error resolution command (step S2721: No). Move to S2723.

<Step S2722>
In step S2722, the MPU 51 sets the error resolution flag on and ends the command determination process. The error resolution flag is referred to when determining whether or not to cancel the error display in step S3007 in the error processing of FIG. 41 described later.

<Step S2723>
In step S2723, the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process after executing the process based on the other commands received from the main control device 4.

[Big hit game production decision processing]
Here, FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process executed in step S2707 of the command determination process of FIG. In the jackpot game effect determination process, the effect to be executed in the jackpot game such as the opening effect, the opening / closing execution mode effect, and the ending effect to be executed in the jackpot game is determined.

<Step S2801>
In step S2801, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the so-called reserved consecutive villa is executed after the end of the jackpot game. The hold consecutive villa is a jackpot (5R) as hit / fail information in any of the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the second hold storage area REB when the jackpot game ends and the game state shifts to the time saving mode. It is executed when the information indicating that it is a probability variation jackpot, a 16R probability variation jackpot, or a 5R normal jackpot) is included. That is, the hold consecutive villa means that the big hit game occurs in the variable game up to the number of holds M at the end of the big hit game. For example, when the number of holds M at the end of the big hit game is 4, the case where the big hit occurs in the variable game within 4 times after the transition to the time saving mode is called a hold consecutive villa. Whether or not the hold consecutive villa is executed can be determined by referring to, for example, the variable type area of the RAM 512 and whether or not the jackpot type specified by the second hold command is stored.

However, in step S2801, the variable type area is referred to at the stage of starting the opening effect, and it is determined whether or not the reserved consecutive villa is executed. That is, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery from the start of the jackpot game effect to the end of the open / close execution mode effect is a jackpot, it is not subject to the determination of the reserved consecutive villa in step S2801. In addition, for the start winning of the game ball to the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315 from the start of the jackpot game effect to the end of the open / close execution mode effect, for example, the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect is executed at the ending. In that case, whether or not the reserved villa is executed depends on whether or not the reserved villa is executed in the ending effect start process of step S3214 in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 44, which will be described later. Whether or not the final effect is executed is determined.

<Step S2802>
When the reserved consecutive villa is executed (step S2801: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the reserved consecutive villa flag to on (step S2802). The reserved consecutive villa flag is referred to when it is determined in step S2907 of the visual inhibition effect determining process of FIG. 36, which will be described later, whether or not to execute the reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect as the visual inhibition effect.

<Step S2803>
In step S2803, the MPU 51 executes a process of determining the opening effect to be executed in the opening from the transition to the jackpot game to the start of the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the opening effect according to the symbol combination of the main symbols that are stopped and displayed, based on, for example, the opening effect table stored in the ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits the determined opening effect type information to the display control device 6 as an opening effect command. Here, as the opening effect, the MPU 51 is an effect that clearly indicates that the symbol combination is "777" and is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and that the symbol combination is "333" and is a 5R probability variation jackpot. When the suggested effect and the symbol combination are doublets other than "777" and "333", the effect suggesting that the 5R is a normal jackpot is determined. That is, the opening effect is determined not according to the jackpot type but according to the symbol combination of the main symbols displayed as stopped.

Further, in the opening effect, a specific image such as an image showing the number of consecutive villas of the jackpot may be displayed. Here, the number of jackpot consecutive villas is as described in step S2712 described above, and is, for example, the number of jackpots from the first hit to the time when the gaming state falls to the normal non-time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, as a specific image displayed in the opening effect, for example, an image of a character including a selected character can be mentioned.

<Step S2804>
In step S2804, the MPU 51 specifies the jackpot type and the selected character. The MPU 51 specifies the jackpot type based on the jackpot flag type (5R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variation jackpot flag, and 16R probability variation jackpot flag) set to be turned on in step S2703 of the command determination process of FIG. On the other hand, the MPU 51 identifies which of the characters 1 to 9, for example, the selected character is, by referring to the RMA 512.

<Steps S2805 and S2806>
In step S2805, the MPU 51 determines the open / close execution mode effect determination table according to the jackpot type and the selected character specified in step S2804, and further determines the open / close execution mode effect based on the open / close execution mode effect determination table. Execute (step S2806).

Here, FIG. 34 shows an example of the opening / closing execution mode effect determining table for 5R, and FIG. 35 shows an example of the opening / closing execution mode effect determining table for 16R.

The opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 5R shown in FIG. 34 is a table referred to by the MPU 51 when determining the opening / closing execution mode effect at the time of a 5R jackpot. That is, the MPU 51 determines the opening / closing execution mode effect at the time of the 5R jackpot by using the same 5R open / close execution mode effect determination table for the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variation jackpot. Of course, it is also possible to prepare different 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination tables for the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variation jackpot, and determine the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect based on them.

The opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 5R includes an effect scenario table corresponding to the selected character. In the present embodiment, any one of characters 1 to 9 can be selected as the selected character, so that the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 5R includes nine effect scenario tables corresponding to each of the characters 1 to 9. Including. In addition, in FIG. 34, each effect scenario table is represented as "5R character N effect scenario table" (N is an integer of 1 to 9). Each effect scenario table consists of an effect scenario type, a round game effect character type, and a scenario type counter.

The effect scenario type specifies a combination of round game effects executed in the round games of 1R to 5R. In the present embodiment, five effect scenarios are set for each of the selected characters, and in each scenario, a character effect (hereinafter, referred to as “specific character effect”) in which the selected character is the main character is executed. Here, as the character production in the round game, for example, reproduction of a character promotion video (PV), display of a character introduction video or a still image, and the like can be considered.

The number of effect scenarios for the selected character is not limited to five, and may be another number, and it is not necessary to set the same number of scenarios for each of the selected characters. Further, in each scenario, the character effect is executed in all the round games, but the character effect is executed in some round games, and the round game effect other than the character effect is executed in the other round games. Good.

The round game effect character type specifies the round game effect executed in each round game of 1R to 5R. In FIG. 34, the character effect mainly composed of the character N (N is an integer of 1 to 9) is represented as "character N" (N is an integer of 1 to 9). Then, a specific character effect is defined for each scenario, and it is determined that this specific character effect is executed in the same round (specific unit game) regardless of which scenario is selected. In the present embodiment, it is determined that the specific character effect is executed in 1R of each scenario. That is, in the 5R jackpot game, the specific character effect for the selected character is always executed in the 1R round game. Therefore, since the player can grasp in advance the round game in which the specific character effect is executed, it is possible to prevent, for example, paying attention to the variable winning opening 316 and overlooking the specific character effect for the selected character. The specific character effect does not necessarily have to be executed in 1R, and may be in rounds after 2R.

The scenario type counter is a counter for selecting an effect scenario, and an effect scenario is associated with each count value in a predetermined range of the scenario type counter. For example, in the production scenario table for 5R character 1, the counter value of the scenario type counter is "0 to 39" for "character 1 scenario A", and the counter value is "40 to 79" for "character 1 scenario B". Values "80 to 119" are for "Character 1 Scenario C", counter values are "120 to 159" for "Character 1 Scenario D", and counter values are "160 to 199" for "Character 1 Scenario E". It is associated. Further, the scenario type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 199, and is added one by one in the counter update process of step S1907 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 19, and the MPU 51 determines the opening / closing execution mode effect. It is possible to determine the production scenario based on the count value of the scenario type counter acquired at that time. For example, when the selected character is "character 1" and the counter value of the scenario type counter is "88", "character 1 scenario C" is determined as the effect scenario.

The 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table shown in FIG. 35 is a table referred to by the MPU 51 when determining the opening / closing execution mode effect at the time of 16R jackpot. The opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 16R includes an effect scenario table corresponding to a selected character including an effect scenario type, a round game effect character type, and a scenario type counter, similarly to the open / close execution mode effect determination table for 5R. Since the effect scenario type, the round game effect character type, and the scenario type counter have already been described in the 5R open / close execution mode effect determination table, the description thereof is omitted here. In the 16R open / close execution mode effect determination table, it is determined that the specific character effect is executed in the same round regardless of which scenario is selected.

In the present embodiment, the 16R open / close execution mode effect determination table has a larger number of scenarios in each scenario table than the 5R open / close execution mode effect determination table, and 12 scenarios are set. Of course, in the 16R open / close execution mode effect determination table, the number of scenarios in each scenario table may be the same as the 5R open / close execution mode effect determination table, or even less than the 5R open / close execution mode effect determination table. Good. Further, the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table is not limited to the one that executes the effect of different character types for each round game, but also executes the effects of different character types at regular intervals (for example, the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 316). It may be something to do.

Further, in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table of the present embodiment, the specific character effect for the selected character is determined by fixing it to one round (specific round) of the round game, but when the game situation is advantageous for the player, For example, when the reserved consecutive villa is confirmed, when the next jackpot is scheduled to be executed relatively, such as when it is a probabilistic jackpot, in a gaming situation that is advantageous for such a player. In a certain jackpot game, the specific character effect may not be executed. As a result, the player can enjoy the jackpot game by paying attention to whether or not the specific character effect is executed in one round of the round game. If the specific character effect is not executed in the jackpot game because the game situation is advantageous for the player, the specific character effect may be performed a plurality of times in the next jackpot game. For example, a specific character effect may be executed in all round games in the open / close execution mode, or a specific character effect may be performed in at least one of the opening and ending in addition to all the round games in the open / close execution mode. You may want to do it. As a result, the player can enjoy the specific character production in the current jackpot game up to the amount of the previous jackpot game when the specific character production is not executed in the previous jackpot. In addition, regarding the execution of a specific character effect in all round games in the open / close execution mode, it is a condition that the game situation is advantageous for the player, as in the case of a probabilistic jackpot and the case where the reserved consecutive villa is confirmed. May be good.

<Step S2807>
Returning to the description of FIG. 33, in step S2807, the MPU 51 executes a process of determining the ending effect to be executed in the ending from the end of the open / close execution mode to the end of the jackpot game. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the ending effect according to the jackpot type, for example, based on the ending effect table stored in the ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits the determined ending effect type information to the display control device 6 as an ending effect command.

Here, the ending effect informs the player that the jackpot game ends after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, in the ending effect, for example, information such as the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the variable game that triggered the execution of the jackpot game (clarification of the game state that shifts after the end of the jackpot game) is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. To. Specifically, in the ending effect, the lottery result is obtained in the normal time-saving game state (the state in which the low-probability mode is in the high-frequency support mode) or the normal non-time-saving game state (the state in which the low-probability mode is not in the high-frequency support mode). When the so-called first hit, which is a jackpot, is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, an image indicating that the player shifts to the probability variation time-shortening game state, which is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. When the first hit is a 5R normal jackpot, an image clearly indicating that the normal non-time saving game state is entered is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. An image that clearly indicates the transition to the probabilistic time-shortening gaming state is, for example, "○○ RUSH rush". On the other hand, an image that clearly indicates that the normal non-time saving game state is entered is, for example, "chance zone entry", and the number of time saving is also displayed. In addition, in the ending effect when the lottery result is a big hit in the probabilistic time-shortening game state, an image clearly indicating that the probabilistic time-shortening game state is entered again is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. An image that clearly indicates that the transition to the probabilistic time-shortening game state is made again is, for example, "○○ RUSH continuation". In addition, the ending effect is an image showing the number of transitions to the probabilistic time-shortening game state for one initial hit (for example, the number of continuations of RUSH) and the image of the character that appeared in the jackpot effect in the variable game that led to the jackpot game. It may be displayed on the display unit 341. An image showing the number of transitions to the probabilistic time-short game state and an image of the character are determined in this step S2807.

Further, in the ending effect, an image related to the number of balls to be played in the jackpot game, the total number of balls to be played in the consecutive villa, and the like is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. In addition, the ending effect may display a definite image or the like that clearly indicates that the reserved villa described later will be executed. These images are determined, for example, in the ending effect start process of step S3214 in the jackpot game effect process described later with reference to FIG. 44.

<Step S2808>
In step S2808, the MPU 51 executes a visual recognition inhibition effect determination process that hinders the visual recognition of the image game effect executed by the symbol display unit 341, and ends the jackpot game effect process. The details of the visual inhibition effect determination process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 36 to 40.

In the jackpot game effect determination process shown in FIG. 33, the opening effect, the opening / closing execution mode effect, the ending effect, and the visual inhibition effect are determined in this order, but the order in which each effect is determined is limited to the order shown in FIG. Not done. For example, the ending effect may be determined before the opening / closing execution mode effect, or the visual impairment effect may be determined before at least one of the opening / closing execution mode effect and the ending effect. Further, the opening / closing execution mode effect or the visual impairment effect is not limited to the time when the jackpot game start command is received (at the start of the jackpot game), and may be determined at the start of the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the visual impairment effect is determined before the opening / closing execution mode effect, the opening / closing execution mode effect is determined so that the specific character effect for the selected character is executed in the round game in which the visual impairment effect is not executed. This point will be described later as a ninth embodiment with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63.

[Visual inhibition effect determination process]
Here, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the visual inhibition effect determination process executed in step S2808 of the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 33. In the visual inhibition effect determination process, it is determined whether or not to execute the visual inhibition effect, and when the visual inhibition effect is executed, the timing at which the visual inhibition effect is executed is determined.

Here, the visual impairment effect is an effect that hinders the visual recognition of the image game effect executed by the symbol display unit 341, inhibits the visual recognition of a part of the game image effect, and allows a part of the game image effect to be visually recognized. Includes an effect that hinders the visibility of all or substantially all of the effect and the game image effect, and makes the game image effect completely or almost invisible. Further, the visual inhibition effect is not limited to the effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 such as the layer image effect in which the image is displayed on the visible layer on the display screen of the symbol display unit 341, and the symbol display unit 341 The front display image effect executed in the translucent front display arranged so as to cover the symbol display unit 341 on the front surface, and the movable accessory member 39 moves to a position covering the display screen of the symbol display unit 341. Includes character game production. Further, in the layer image effect, for example, in addition to the effect that the visibility of a part or all of the game image is hindered by displaying the layer image superimposed on the game image effect on the symbol display unit 341, the game image effect is executed. Includes an effect in which a layer image is displayed on the entire display screen of the symbol display unit 341 instead of the game image effect. In addition, the layer image displayed superimposed on the game image effect is not only a non-transparent layer image in which the image of the lower layer cannot be visually recognized, but also a visible layer image in the lower layer, for example, thinly or vaguely in the lower layer. Includes a transparent layer image that allows you to see the layer image.

In the following, before explaining the visual impairment effect determination process shown in FIG. 36, the opening / closing execution mode effect and the visual impairment effect will be described first with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40.

FIG. 37A is a diagram showing an example of a scenario of an opening / closing execution mode effect determined by the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 33 and a round game for executing a visual impairment effect. In FIG. 37 (A), the open / close execution mode effect is an example in which "character 1 scenario A" is determined as the effect scenario in the 16R probability variation jackpot game when the selected character is character 1. In the opening / closing execution mode production of the 16R jackpot "Character 1 Scenario A", character production mainly consisting of character 1, character 2, character 14, character 7 ... And character 10 is executed in this order as a round game production. Will be done. Here, the specific character effect for the selected character is fixedly executed in one round (first unit game) as described later (see FIGS. 34 and 35). In the example of FIG. 37 (A), the selected character is character 1, and the specific character effect for this character 1 is executed in one round.

Further, in the example of FIG. 37 (A), as the visual inhibition effect, a specific number of balls display effect is executed in 2 rounds, a hold consecutive villa confirmation effect is executed in 3 rounds, and a promotion effect is executed in 4 rounds. Then, for the round in which the specific number of balls display effect is executed, the specific number of balls display flag stored in the RAM 512 is set to on, and for the round in which the specific number of balls display effect is not executed, the specific number of balls display flag is set. Is set to off. In the example of FIG. 37 (A), the specific number payout display flag is set to on for the two rounds in which the specific number payout display effect is executed, and the specific number payout display flag is set to off in the other rounds. (See steps S2915 and S2916 in FIG. 36).

Then, in the game machine 10, it is determined that the specific character effect for the selected character is executed in one round as described above (see steps S2804 to S2806, FIGS. 34 and 35 in FIG. 33). It is determined that each of the pending consecutive villa confirmation effect and the promotion effect, which are the visual impairment effects, is executed after the second round (steps S2906 and S2911 in FIG. 36).

Further, in the game machine 10, the jackpot game effect (opening effect, opening / closing execution mode effect, ending effect, and visual inhibition effect) determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 33 is described in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 44, which will be described later. Will be executed.

By the way, as a conventional game machine, in a round game in a jackpot game, in addition to a video such as a PV (promotion video) of a character appearing in a production in a variable game, a still image such as a character introduction image is displayed. is there. In addition, in the jackpot game, a promotion effect that suggests or clearly indicates promotion from a normal jackpot to a probabilistic jackpot, and a hold consecutive villa confirmation effect that clearly indicates that the jackpot that will be a reserved consecutive villa after the jackpot game has been won are executed. There is also a game machine to play.

However, the promotion effect and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect are generally executed by obstructing the visibility of the effect on the character. For example, the movable accessory member operates so as to cover the symbol display unit, and an overlay image for notifying the result of the promotion effect and the confirmation of the reserved consecutive villa is displayed on the symbol display unit, so that the character The visibility of the production is hindered. Therefore, the visibility of the effect of the favorite character may be hindered by the movable accessory or the overlay image at the timing when the effect of the player's favorite character is executed. When such a situation occurs, the player cannot fully enjoy the production of the favorite character.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the specific character effect for the selected character is executed at a timing different from the visual impairment effect that hinders the visual recognition of the specific character effect. That is, in the game machine 10, in each jackpot game, a specific character effect is fixedly executed in a specific round game among a plurality of round games, and a visual inhibition effect is executed in a round game different from this specific round. To do. Specifically, in the game machine 10, the visual impairment effect that hinders the visibility of the character effect such as the promotion effect and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect is one round (specific round), which is the execution round of the specific character effect for the selected character. It will be executed after the 2nd round that was avoided. Therefore, the visual recognition of the specific character effect on the selected character is not hindered by the visual impairment effect, and the player can fully enjoy the selected character in the specific character effect in the jackpot game.

Further, FIG. 37 (B) is a diagram showing an example of the round game effect screen 81. As shown in FIG. 37 (B), the round game effect screen 81 has a round number display image 811, a jackpot round number display image 812, and a character introduction image 813.

The round number display image 811 is an image that displays the number of rounds being executed. The number of rounds display image 811 shown in FIG. 37B shows that the number of rounds being executed is four.

The jackpot round number display image 812 is an image suggesting the maximum number of round games executed in the jackpot game. The jackpot round number display image 812 shown in FIG. 37 (B) suggests that the maximum number of round games executed in the jackpot game is 5 rounds, that is, the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot or 5R probability variation jackpot. There is.

The character introduction image 813 is a still image displayed in the character effect, and displays the characteristics of the character displayed in the variable game effect. In the character introduction image 813 shown in FIG. 37 (B), the features of the character 7 are displayed together with the image of the character 7. Note that FIG. 37 (B) has described an example in which an introduction image of the selected character is displayed as a still image as a specific character effect for the selected character. Often, it may be a combination of a moving image and a still image. Further, the specific character effect is not limited to displaying an image for introducing the selected character, and is not particularly limited as long as it is an image mainly composed of the selected character, in addition to a moving image such as a promotion video.

Further, FIGS. 38 (A) to 38 (F) are diagrams showing an example of a promotion effect executed as a visual impairment effect in the jackpot game effect. The promotion effect includes a promotion success effect shown in FIGS. 38 (A) to 38 (C) and a promotion failure effect shown in FIGS. 38 (A), 38 (E) and 38 (F). In the open / close execution mode effect shown in FIG. 37 (A), the promotion effect is executed in four rounds of the round game in the open / close execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 38 (A), in the promotion effect, the round game effect screen 81 (see FIG. 37 (B)) first shifts to the button operation request screen 82 in both the promotion success effect and the promotion failure effect. The button operation request screen 82 is a screen in which an operation button image 821 imitating the operation button 20 is superimposed and displayed as an overlay image on the round game effect screen 81, and is a screen that prompts the player to operate the operation button 20. .. In the button operation request screen 82, the operation button image 821 hinders the visual recognition of the character introduction image displayed as the character effect. Therefore, the effect of displaying the operation button image 821 corresponds to the visual impairment effect of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 38 (B), in the promotion success effect, the round game in which the display of the operation button image 821 is canceled on condition that the operation button 20 is operated by the player while the operation button image 821 is displayed. Along with the transition to the effect screen 81, the movable accessory operation effect in which the movable accessory member 39 moves from the standby position to the operating position is executed. In the state where the movable accessory member 39 is moved to the operating position, the round game effect screen 81 is covered by the movable accessory member 39, and the visibility of the round game effect screen 81 is hindered. That is, the movable accessory operation effect in the promotion success effect is executed with an effect that hinders the visibility of the character introduction image displayed as the character effect. In the promotion effect, if the operation button 20 is not operated while the operation button image 821 is being displayed, the movable accessory operation effect may be executed immediately after the display of the operation button image 821 is canceled, or the operation button 20 may be restored. As the effect, the movable accessory operation effect may be executed immediately after the end of the round game or at the ending, or the promotion effect in the jackpot game may be postponed.

As shown in FIGS. 38 (C) and 38 (D), in the promotion success effect, after the movable accessory operation effect is executed, the movable accessory member 39 returns from the operating position to the standby position, and the display screen is rounded. The game effect screen 81 shifts to the promotion success effect screen 83, and after a certain period of time, the game returns to the round game effect screen 81. The promotion success effect screen 83 shown in FIG. 38 (C) is a screen that clearly indicates that the promotion success effect has been executed, and includes a character image 831 that clearly indicates the promotion success of "Congratulations on promotion !!". The character image 831 is superimposed and displayed on the entire round game effect screen 81 as an overlay image of the round game effect screen 81, and completely hinders the visibility of the character introduction image displayed as the character effect. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character image 831 as the promotion success effect corresponds to the visual impairment effect of the present invention.

Further, in the round game effect screen 81 shown in FIG. 38 (D), since the round number display image suggests that the jackpot type is 5R, the jackpot round number display image clearly indicating that the jackpot type is 16R. It is changed to 812. That is, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot round number display image 812 of the round game effect screen 81, an image suggesting that the jackpot type is 5R is displayed before the promotion success effect is executed, and after the promotion success effect is executed. Is displayed with an image clearly indicating that the jackpot type is 16R.

In this embodiment, the promotion success effect is described as clearly indicating the promotion from the 5R normal jackpot or the 5R probability variation jackpot to the 16R jackpot, but the promotion effect clearly indicates the promotion from the 5R normal jackpot to the 5R probability variation jackpot. You may run it as you do. Further, the promotion success effect may be executed as an effect of displaying a promotion confirmation image, for example, an image shown in FIG. 38 (C), which clearly indicates the promotion success, without executing the movable accessory operation effect. On the contrary, the promotion success effect may be an effect of executing the movable accessory operation effect without displaying the promotion confirmation image indicating the promotion success. Further, as shown in FIG. 38C, the promotion confirmed image does not need to be displayed as a non-transparent image in which the lower layer image cannot be confirmed at all on the entire round game effect screen 81, and is one of the round game effect screen 81. It may be displayed so as to cover the part, and in any case of covering a part or the whole of the round game effect screen 81, the lower layer image is displayed as a transparent image that can be confirmed faintly or vaguely. You may. Further, even if the promotion effect is an effect in which the movable accessory operation effect is executed without shifting to the button operation request screen 82 that displays the operation button image 821 that prompts the player to operate the operation button 20. Good. Further, in the promotion success effect, the movable accessory member 39 is configured as having a display such as a liquid crystal display device, and a promotion confirmation image clearly indicating that the jackpot type is 16R is displayed on this display. Good.

As shown in FIGS. 38 (E) and 38 (F), in the promotion failure effect, the display screen shifts from the round game effect screen 81 to the promotion failure effect screen 84, and a certain period of time (for example, 1 second to 5 seconds) occurs. After that, the screen returns to the round game effect screen 81. The promotion failure effect screen 84 shown in FIG. 38 (E) is a screen that clearly indicates that the promotion failure effect has been executed, and includes a character image 841 that clearly indicates the promotion failure with “Zannen”. The character image 841 is superimposed and displayed on the entire round game effect screen 81 as an overlay image of the round game effect screen 81, and hinders the visibility of the character introduction image displayed as the character effect. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character image 841 corresponds to the visual impairment effect of the present invention.

The promotion failure effect may be executed as an effect in which the movable accessory member 39 does not operate without displaying the character image 841 that clearly indicates the promotion failure. Further, the promotion confirmed image can be changed in the same manner as in the case of the promotion confirmed image. That is, the promotion confirmed image does not need to be displayed as a non-transparent image in which the lower layer image cannot be confirmed at all on the entire round game effect screen 81 as shown in FIG. 38 (E), and is one of the round game effect screen 81. It may be displayed so as to cover the part, and in any case of covering a part or the whole of the round game effect screen 81, the lower layer image is displayed as a transparent image that can be confirmed faintly or vaguely. You may.

Further, on the round game effect screen 81 shown in FIG. 38 (F), a jackpot round number display image 812 clearly indicating that the jackpot type is 5R is displayed. That is, in the present embodiment, the jackpot round number display image 812 of the round game effect screen 81 does not change before and after the execution of the promotion failure effect.

39 (A) to 39 (C) are diagrams showing an example of a reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect executed as a visual impairment effect in the jackpot game effect. As shown in FIG. 39 (A), in the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect, first, on the round game effect screen 81, the movable accessory operation effect in which the movable accessory member 39 moves from the standby position to the operation position is executed. In the state where the movable accessory member 39 is moved to the operating position, the round game effect screen 81 is covered by the movable accessory member 39, and the visibility of the round game effect screen 81 is hindered. That is, the movable accessory operation effect in the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect is executed with an effect that hinders the visibility of the character introduction image displayed as the character effect.

As shown in FIG. 39 (B), in the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect, after the movable accessory operation effect is executed, the movable accessory member 39 returns from the operating position to the standby position, and the display screen is the round game effect screen 81. The screen shifts to the hold consecutive villa confirmation display screen 85, and returns to the round game production screen 81 after a certain period of time (for example, 1 second to 5 seconds) has elapsed. The reserved consecutive villa confirmation display screen 85 shown in FIG. 39 (B) is a screen that clearly indicates that the reserved consecutive villa will be executed, and clearly indicates that the reserved consecutive villa will be executed with “confirmed reserved consecutive villa”. Includes character image 851. The character image 851 is superimposed and displayed on the entire round game effect screen 81 as an overlay image of the round game effect screen 81, and hinders the visibility of the character introduction image displayed as the character effect. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character image 851 corresponds to the visual impairment effect of the present invention.

In addition, the reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect is a reserved consecutive villa confirmed image showing that the reserved consecutive villa is executed without executing the movable accessory operation effect, for example, the reserved consecutive villa confirmed image shown in FIG. 39 (B). May be executed as an effect of displaying. Further, even if the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect is to execute the movable accessory operation effect after shifting to the button operation request screen 82 that displays the operation button image 821 that prompts the player to operate the operation button 20. Good. Further, in the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect, the movable accessory member 39 may be configured as having a display such as a liquid crystal display device, and the hold consecutive villa confirmation image may be displayed.

40 (A) to 40 (C) are diagrams showing an example of a specific number of balls display effect executed as a visual impairment effect in the jackpot game effect. As shown in FIGS. 40 (A) to 40 (C), in the specific number payout display effect, the display screen shifts from the round game effect screen 81 to the specific number payout display image display screen 86 for a certain period of time (for example, After 1 second to 5 seconds have passed, the display screen returns from the specific number of balls display image display screen 86 to the round game effect screen 81. The specific number payout display image display screen 86 includes an image for notifying the player that the number of payouts has reached a specific number.

Here, the specific number of balls is displayed, for example, as a display for the cumulative number of balls, which is the sum of the number of winning balls for winning the variable winning opening 316 in a series of big hits (renso big hits) from the first hit. The so-called difference, which is the difference between the number of balls and the number of launching game balls at the time of big hit (the number of out balls) (or not only the number of launching game balls at the time of big hit game but also the number of launching game balls in the probability variation time saving mode that shifts after the big hit game) Executed as a display for the number of balls, or as a display for the cumulative number of balls released by adding the number of prize balls from other winning openings such as the general winning opening 313 as well as the cumulative number of balls discharged for the number of winning balls of the variable winning opening 316. Will be done.

The specific number of payout display image display screen 86 of FIG. 40B includes a character image 861 of "3000 shots OVER" that notifies that the number of payouts has reached 3000. The character image 861 is superimposed and displayed on the entire round game effect screen 81 as an overlay image of the round game effect screen 81, and hinders the visibility of the character introduction image displayed as the character effect. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character image 861 corresponds to the visual impairment effect of the present invention. Further, the specific number of balls display image display screen 86 does not necessarily have to be an overlay image of the round game effect screen 81. That is, on the specific number of balls display image display screen 86, the character image 861 may be displayed without executing the round game effect in the lower layer thereof.

Here, the specific number is set to, for example, a positive integer multiple of the minimum specific number. The minimum specific number is set to 1000, for example. Of course, the specific number is not limited to 1000, and may be another numerical value such as 500 or 2000.

<Steps S2901 and S2902>
Returning to the description of FIG. 36, in step S2901, the MPU 51 is set to turn on any of the first to third promotion effect flags set to be turned on in step S2703 in the command determination process of FIG. 30, that is, open / close. It is determined whether or not to execute the promotion effect as the round game effect in the execution mode. When any of the first to third promotion effect flags is set to on (step S2901: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the promotion effect flag set to on to off (step S2902), and performs processing. The process proceeds to step S2906. On the other hand, when all of the first to third promotion effect flags are set to off (step S2901: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2903.

<Step S2903>
In step S2903, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot type is a 5R jackpot. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the promotion effect is a 5R jackpot that can be executed or a 16R jackpot that the promotion effect is not executed. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2904 when the jackpot type is a 5R jackpot (step S2903: Yes), and when the jackpot type is not a 5R jackpot (step S2903: No), that is, when the jackpot type is a 16R jackpot. The process proceeds to step S2907.

<Step S2904 and Step S2905>
When the jackpot type is not a 5R jackpot (step S2903: No), the MPU 51 draws a lottery to execute the promotion failure effect (step S2904), and determines whether or not the result is to execute the promotion failure effect. (Step S2905). That is, in the present embodiment, when the lottery is won in the 5R jackpot, the promotion failure effect is executed. Of course, without drawing lots, the promotion failure effect may always be executed when the promotion effect flag is set off on the condition that the jackpot type is 5R jackpot.

<Step S2906>
In step S2906, the MPU 51 sets the number of rounds of the round game for executing the promotion effect to the second and subsequent rounds. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the number of rounds of the round game for executing the promotion success effect to 2 on condition that any of the first to third promotion effect flags is set to ON (step S2901: Yes). Set after the round. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 wins the lottery to execute the promotion failure effect on condition that all of the first to third promotion effect flags are set to off (step S2901: No) (step S2905: Yes), set the number of rounds of the round game for executing the promotion failure effect to the second and subsequent rounds. For example, the MPU 51 determines the round to execute the promotion effect based on the lottery table for determining the promotion effect after the second round (for example, the lottery table in which there is no winning value for executing the promotion effect in one round). To do. In the example shown in FIG. 37 (A), the promotion effect is set to be executed in four rounds.

According to this step S2906, when executing the promotion effect which is a visual inhibition effect, it is determined to execute the promotion effect after the second round avoiding the one round (specific round) which is the execution round of the specific character effect for the selected character. Then, the promotion effect determined by avoiding the specific round is executed by step S3404 in the round game effect process of FIG.

<Steps S2907 and S2908>
In step S2907, the MPU 51 is set to turn on the hold consecutive villa flag set to be on in step S2802 in the jackpot effect determination process of FIG. Decide whether to execute. When the reserved consecutive villa flag is set to on (step S2907: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the reserved consecutive villa flag to off (step S2908), and shifts the process to step S2909. On the other hand, when the reserved consecutive villa flag is set to off (step S2906: No), the MPU 51 ends the visual inhibition effect determination process.

<Steps S2909 and S2910>
In step S2909, the MPU 51 temporarily sets the number of rounds of the round game for executing the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect on the condition that the hold consecutive villa flag is set to on (step S2907: Yes). Then, it is determined whether or not the round for executing the temporarily set hold consecutive villa confirmation effect matches the round for executing the promotion effect (step S2910). For example, the MPU 51 is based on a lottery table for determining the hold consecutive villa final effect after the second round (for example, a lottery table in which there is no winning value for executing the hold consecutive villa final effect in one round). Decide the round to execute the villa confirmation production.

Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2909 when the execution round of the temporarily set hold consecutive villa confirmation effect matches the execution round of the promotion effect (step S2910: Yes). That is, until the MPU 51 determines that the execution round of the temporarily set hold consecutive villa final effect does not match the execution round of the promotion effect (step S2910: No), the temporary hold consecutive villa final effect execution round of step S2909 is tentative. The setting and the determination as to whether or not the execution round of the temporarily set hold consecutive villa confirmation effect in step S2910 matches the execution round of the promotion effect are repeatedly performed. On the other hand, when the execution round of the temporarily set hold consecutive villa confirmation effect does not match the execution round of the promotion effect (step S2910: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2911.

<Step S2911>
In step S2911, the MPU 51 sets the execution round of the reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect temporarily set after the second round in step S2909 as the round for executing the reserved consecutive villa final effect. In the example shown in FIG. 37 (A), it is set that the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect is executed in three rounds.

According to these steps S2909 to S2911, when the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect which is the visual inhibition effect is executed, the hold sequence is held after the second round avoiding the one round (specific round) which is the execution round of the specific character effect for the selected character. It is decided to execute the villa finalization effect, and the reserved consecutive villa finalization effect determined avoiding the specific round is executed by step S3406 in the round game effect processing of FIG. 46, which will be described later. Further, in step S2910, it is avoided that the execution round of the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect is not only the execution round of the specific character effect but also the execution round of the promotion effect. On the other hand, the promotion (success) production and the reserved consecutive villa confirmation production, which are visual inhibition effects, are the productions that clearly indicate to the player that the game situation is advantageous for the player. Not only is the visual inhibition effect such as the final effect executed in a round game different from the specific character effect for the selected character, but it is avoided that the visual inhibition effects are executed simultaneously or in the same round game. Therefore, the player is given an opportunity to perform the visual inhibition effect a plurality of times, which clearly indicates that the game situation is advantageous for the player, while fully enjoying the selected character by the specific character effect on the selected character. As a result, the player can fully enjoy not only the specific character effect but also the visual impairment effect in the jackpot game.

<Step S2912>
In step S2912, the MPU 51 sets the estimated number of balls to be ejected in the jackpot game with respect to the cumulative number of balls to be ejected stored in the RAM 512 in the ball ejection counting process executed in step S2712 of the command determination process of FIG. By adding, the cumulative number of balls to be played at the end of the jackpot game is estimated. The estimated number of balls is the number of winnings (counting number) in which the variable winning opening 316 is closed before the maximum opening time (for example, 30 seconds) of the variable winning opening 316 elapses with respect to the number of rounds according to the jackpot type. And, it is estimated as a value obtained by multiplying the number of payout game balls (number of prize balls) for the winning of the variable winning opening 316. For example, when the number of counts is 9 for a 5R jackpot and the number of prize balls for the variable winning opening 316 is 13, the estimated number of balls to be played is 5R × 9C × 13 = 585.

As described above, the specific number of payout display is, for example, as a display for the cumulative number of payouts obtained by adding the number of prize balls for winning the variable winning opening 316 in a series of jackpots (renso jackpot) from the first hit. The so-called difference ball, which is the difference between the cumulative number of balls to be launched (the number of out balls) (or not only the number of balls to be launched during the jackpot game, but also the number of game balls to be launched in the probabilistic time saving mode that shifts after the jackpot game) It is executed as a display for the number of balls, or as a display for the cumulative number of balls to be paid out not only for the number of prize balls of the variable winning opening 316 but also for the number of winning balls from other winning openings such as the general winning opening 313. Can be considered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the round game effect of the jackpot game, it is fixed to one round of the specific character effect for the selected character and determined first (steps S2804 to S2806 in FIG. 33), and then the cumulative number of balls is specified. By estimating the round game in which the number shifts, the execution round of the specific number of balls display effect as the visual inhibition effect is determined after the second round avoiding the execution round of the specific character effect (steps S2913 to S2916 described later). ..

However, the number of launched game balls (number of out balls) and the number of prize balls from other winning openings are likely to vary, and it is difficult to estimate them in advance. Therefore, the number of launched game balls (number of out balls) ) And other winning openings, it is difficult to accurately estimate the round game in which the number of balls is more than a specific number. Therefore, in this step S2912, it is not necessary to consider the number of launching game balls (the number of out balls) and the number of prize balls from other winning openings as the cumulative number of balls to be ejected. Is estimated as the number of balls to be played. Then, in the present embodiment, the specific number of payout display effect is executed based on the cumulative number of payouts obtained by adding the number of prize balls for winning the variable winning opening 316.

<Step S2913>
In step S2913, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the estimated cumulative number of balls to be played in step S2912 exceeds a specific number that has not been reached among a plurality of predetermined specific numbers. For example, when the specific number is set to a positive integer multiple of 1000, which is the minimum specific number, and the cumulative number of balls stored in the RAM 512 at the start of the jackpot game is 1794, the cumulative number of balls to be ejected at the end of the jackpot game. Is 2379 (1794 + 585), so the MPU 51 determines that the estimated cumulative number of balls to be played in this jackpot game exceeds a specific number. On the other hand, for example, when the cumulative number of balls to be ejected stored in the RAM 512 at the start of the jackpot game is 1170 in a 5R jackpot, the estimated number of balls to be ejected is 1755 (1170 + 5R × 9C × 13). In such a case, the MPU 51 determines that the estimated cumulative number of balls to be played does not exceed the specific number.

Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2914 when the estimated cumulative number of balls to be ejected exceeds the specific number (step S2913: Yes), and when the estimated cumulative number of balls to be ejected does not exceed the specific number (step S2913: No). , The visual inhibition effect determination process is terminated.

<Step S2914>
When the estimated cumulative number of balls to be ejected exceeds a specific number (step S2913: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game exceeding the specific number is one round (step S2914). For example, in the estimation example of step S2912, the cumulative number of balls to be ejected is 2002 (1794 + 208) when 16 game balls are won (16C × 13 = 208) for the variable winning opening 316, so 2 rounds. It can be estimated that the number exceeds 2000, which is a specific number, at 7C. In such a case, the MPU 51 estimates that there are two rounds in which the estimated cumulative number of balls is more than a specific number (a specific number of balls is displayed).

In the case of a 5R jackpot, a round game in which the cumulative number of balls exceeds a specific number (a specific number of balls display round) is usually once when the specific number is set to a positive integer multiple of 1000. is there. On the other hand, in the case of a 16R jackpot, the estimated number of balls to be ejected in the jackpot game may exceed 1000 (for example, 16R x 9C x 13 = 1872), so the estimated cumulative number of balls to be ejected is a specific number. A round game that exceeds (a specific number of balls display round) can be two rounds. For example, when the cumulative number of balls to be ejected is 1794, in addition to the above two rounds, the estimated number of balls to be ejected at the end of the round is 3081 (1794 + 117 (= number of balls for 1R = 9C x 13). ) × 11) 11 rounds are also estimated as rounds in which the estimated cumulative number of balls is exceeded.

Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2915 when the round game in which the estimated cumulative number of balls is exceeded is one round (step S2914: Yes), and the round in which the estimated cumulative number of balls exceeds the specific number If the game is not one round (step S2914: No), the visual inhibition effect determination process is terminated.

<Step S2915>
When the round game in which the estimated cumulative number of balls exceeds a specific number is one round (step S2914: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the specific number of balls display flag for two rounds to on (step S2915), and the visibility is hindered. The production determination process ends. This specific number payout display flag is a flag indicating whether or not the round game is to execute the specific number payout display, and the specific number payout display is executed in the round game set to be on. That is, when the specific number payout display flag for 2 rounds is set to on in this step S2915, the specific number payout display is executed in 2 rounds. The specific number payout display flag is referred to in step S3301 in the payout display process of FIG. 45, which will be described later.

<Step S2916>
When the round game in which the estimated cumulative number of balls exceeds a specific number is not one round (step S2914: No), the MPU 51 turns on the specific number of balls display flag corresponding to the round game in which the estimated cumulative number of balls exceeds a specific number. Is set to (step S2916), and the visual inhibition effect determination process is terminated.

[Error handling]
41 and 42 are flowcharts showing an example of an error processing procedure executed in step S1910 of the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. In the error processing, when an error occurs, the symbol display unit 341 executes a process of displaying an error. For example, when an error occurs during execution of the opening / closing execution mode effect in a jackpot game, an error occurs in which an example is shown in FIG. 43 (B) from the round game effect screen 81 whose display screen shows an example in FIG. 43 (A). The screen shifts to the image display screen 87 (priority display image screen). The error occurrence image display screen 87 notifies that an error has occurred and the type of error, and in the example of FIG. 43B, it shows that a magnet detection error has occurred. The error occurrence image 871 (priority display image) is displayed. Further, the error occurrence image display screen 87 is a screen in which an error display image is superimposed as an overlay image of a screen such as a round game effect screen 81, and is specified when an error display is made during execution of the specific character effect. The visibility of the character effect is hindered. When shifting to the error occurrence image display screen 87, the error display may be performed without displaying the specific character effect as the lower layer of the error display. On the other hand, when the error is resolved, the display screen shows an example from the error occurrence image display screen 87 shown in FIG. 43 (B) to the round game effect screen 81 showing an example shown in FIG. 43 (A), contrary to the case when the error occurs. Return to the display screen corresponding to the game status after the error is cleared.

Further, in the error processing of the present embodiment, when the visibility of the specific character effect for the selected character is hindered by the error display during the jackpot game, for example, when an error is displayed during the execution of the specific character effect, an error is generated. If the specific character effect is executed as the lower layer of the error display while the display is being executed, or if the execution of the specific character effect is stopped because the error display is being executed, the specific character is canceled after the error display is canceled. Enables the execution of production.

By the way, as a conventional game machine, as a conventional game machine, as described above, in a round game in a jackpot game or the like, an effect on a character is executed. Further, in general, when an error occurs in a game machine, it is notified that an error has occurred, for example, in a speaker or a symbol display unit. On the other hand, as an error, in addition to a normal error that does not need to be notified immediately after an error such as a ball jam error occurs as described above, fraud detection that needs to be notified immediately after an error such as a magnet detection error occurs. There is an error.

However, the error notification is also performed in the jackpot game, and for example, an error image indicating that an error has occurred is displayed on the symbol display unit. Therefore, in the jackpot game, for example, the error display for the fraud detection error that needs to be notified immediately after the error occurs is executed, so that the execution timing of the effect for the player's favorite character and the display timing of the error image are changed. May overlap. In this case, the visual recognition of the effect of the favorite character is hindered by the fraud detection error display. Further, sensors for detecting fraud, such as a magnet sensor 35, a radio wave sensor 36, and a vibration detection sensor, may operate due to erroneous detection even when fraud is not actually performed. Therefore, even in a situation where the game is played properly, the fraud detection error display hinders the visibility of the effect of the favorite character. Furthermore, not only the fraud detection error display but also the display timing of the priority display image that notifies the information that needs to be displayed with priority over the character effect overlaps with the execution timing of the character effect, so that the effect of the favorite character is produced. The visibility of the image may be obstructed. When such a situation occurs, the player cannot fully enjoy the production of the favorite character.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the specific character effect while the priority display image such as the error occurrence image 871 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Therefore, in the game machine 10, it is possible to grasp whether the visual recognition of the specific character effect is hindered by the priority display image. As a result, when the priority display image obstructs the visibility of the specific character effect, it becomes possible to compensate for it. For example, when the display of the priority display image is completed by eliminating the error when the visibility of the specific character effect is obstructed by the priority display image, the blocked specific character effect is executed after the display of the priority display image is completed. And so on. As a result, even when the priority display image such as the error occurrence image 871 hinders the visibility of the specific character effect, the player can fully enjoy the specific character effect in the jackpot game.

In the following, the case where the error occurrence image 871 hinders the visibility of the specific character effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42, but compensation for the case where the error occurrence image 871 hinders the visibility of the specific character effect The technical idea of is not limited to the error occurrence image 871, and can be widely applied when the display timing of the priority display image for displaying information that needs to be displayed with priority over the character effect overlaps with the execution timing of the character effect. ..

<Step S3001>
Returning to the description of FIG. 41, in step S3001, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the error occurrence flag set to be ON in step S2720 in the command determination process of FIG. 30 is set to ON. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3002 when the error occurrence flag is set to on (step S3001: Yes), and steps the process when the error occurrence flag is set to off (step S3001: No). Move to S3007.

<Step S3002-Step S3004>
In step S3002, the MPU 51 executes an error display process of superimposing an error display image as an overlay image on the display screen when an error occurs, sets the error display flag to ON (step S3003), and causes an error. The flag is set to off (step S3004). The error display flag indicates whether an error is being displayed, and is referred to in step S3008 of the error processing.

<Step S3005>
In step S3005, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is one round of the open / close execution mode, that is, whether or not the specific character effect is executed as the round game effect of the open / close execution mode in the jackpot game. The determination as to whether or not one round of the open / close execution mode is performed can be performed, for example, based on the number of rounds stored in the RAM 512 when the round game effect start flag is set to ON in step S2712 in the command determination process of FIG. .. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3006 when it is one round of the open / close execution mode (step S3005: Yes), that is, when the specific character effect is executed when an error occurs. On the other hand, the MPU 51 ends the error processing when it is not one round of the open / close execution mode (step S3005: NO), that is, when the specific character effect is not executed when the error occurs.

<Step S3006>
In step S3006, when the MPU 51 is one round of the open / close execution mode (step S3005: Yes), that is, when it is executed by an error display at a timing when the visibility of the specific character effect is hindered, the specific character effect carry-over execution flag is set. Set to on. The specific character effect carry-over execution flag indicates that the visibility of the specific character effect is hindered by the error display, and based on this specific character effect carry-over execution flag, the MPU 51 can visually recognize the specific character effect by the error display. If it is hindered, it becomes possible to determine whether or not to execute the specific character effect after the error display is canceled.

In the present embodiment, regardless of the type of error, when an error occurs, the symbol display unit 341 displays the error, and when the error display is executed at the timing when the visibility of the specific character effect is hindered, the specific character is displayed. The production carry-over execution is set to on. However, if the error display is executed at the timing when the visibility of the specific character effect is hindered, or if an error that requires urgency to notify such as a fraud detection error occurs, the error is displayed while the normal error occurs. When an error that does not require urgency such as is generated, the error may not be displayed immediately after the error occurs. In this case, if an error that does not require urgency, such as a normal error, is resolved at the stage when the specific character effect is completed, it is not necessary to display the error again. Further, when an error that does not require urgency such as a normal error is not resolved at the stage when the specific character effect is completed, the error display may be started after the specific character effect is completed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the visual recognition of the specific character effect from being hindered by the occurrence of a minor error that does not require urgency.

<Step S3007>
In step S3007, when the error occurrence flag is set to off (step S3001: No), is the MPU 51 set to turn on the error resolution flag set to be on in step S2722 in the command determination process of FIG. 30? Judge whether or not. When the error resolution flag is set to on (step S3007: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3010 in FIG. 42, and when the error resolution flag is set to off (step S3007: NO), The process proceeds to step S3008.

<Step S3008>
In step S3008, when both the error occurrence flag and the error resolution flag are set to off (No in both steps S3001 and S3007), the MPU 51 is set to turn on the error display flag indicating whether an error is being displayed. Judge whether or not. When the error display flag is set to on (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3009, and when the error display flag is set to off (step S3008: NO), the error processing To finish.

<Step S3009>
In step S3009, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the specific character effect carry-over execution flag is set to ON, and if the specific character effect carry-over execution flag is set to ON (step S3009: Yes), the error processing. To finish. On the other hand, when the specific character effect carry-over execution flag is set to off (step S3009: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3005. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the execution of the specific character effect is started during the error display. As a result, even if the MPU 51 starts executing the specific character effect during the error display (while an error is occurring) and the visibility of the specific character effect is hindered, the specific character is released after the error display is released. It becomes possible to execute the production.

<Steps S3010 to S3012>
When the error resolution flag is set to on (step S3007: Yes), in step S3010 shown in FIG. 42, the MPU 51 cancels the error display, further sets the error display flag to off (step S3011), and The error resolution flag is set to off (step S3012).

<Step S3013>
In step S3013, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the specific character effect carry-over execution flag set to be turned on in step S3006 of FIG. 41 is set to on. When the specific character effect carry-over execution flag is set to ON (step S3013: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to S3014. On the other hand, when the specific character effect carry-over execution flag is set to off (S3013: No), the MPU 51 ends the error processing without executing the specific character effect.

<Steps S3014 and S3015>
In step S3014, the MPU 51 sets the specific character effect carry-over execution flag to off, and is the round game effect execution flag set to on in step S3402 in the round game effect process of FIG. 46 described later set to on? It is determined whether or not (step S3015). The round game effect execution flag indicates whether or not the round game effect is being executed, and it is possible to determine whether or not the open / close execution mode is based on the round game effect execution flag.

Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3016 when the round game effect execution flag is set to on (step S3015: Yes), and when the round game effect execution flag is set to off (step S3015). : No), the error processing is terminated. That is, even when the specific character effect carry-over execution flag is set to ON, the MPU 51 executes the ending effect even though the jackpot game has not ended, in addition to the case where the jackpot game has ended. In that case, the error processing is terminated without executing the specific character effect.

<Step S3016>
In step S3016, the MPU 51 determines whether or not there is an undigested round game when the error is cleared. Whether or not there is an undigested round game can be determined based on the number of rounds stored in the RAM 512, for example, when the round game start effect flag is set to ON in step S2710 in the command determination process of FIG. it can. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3017 when there is an undigested round game (step S3016: Yes), and shifts the process to step S3018 when there is no undigested round game (step S3016: No). ..

<Steps S3017 and S3018>
In step S3017, when there is an undigested round game (step S3016: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a specific character effect in the RAM 512 as a round game effect of the next round game to be executed (rewriting the round game effect). ), And ends the error processing.

On the other hand, in step S3018, when there is no undigested round game (step S3016: No), the MPU 51 can determine that the error is cleared in the final round game and that the specific character effect can be executed in the ending. In at least a part of the ending, the ending effect is reset so as to execute the specific character effect, and the error processing is ended.

As described above, in steps S3017 and S3018, it is determined to execute the specific character effect when there is an undigested round game after the error is cleared or when the ending effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the specific character effect within a time shorter than the digestion time of one round + the interval from the error release, so that the specific character effect can be executed in a short time from the error release. Become.

Here, when the ending effect is reset so as to execute the specific character effect, the MPU 51 uses either the same character effect or a different character effect as the specific character effect whose visibility is obstructed by the error display. You may decide to do it. Further, when the MPU 51 decides to execute a character effect different from the specific character effect whose visibility is obstructed by the error display, the MPU 51 is for an ending effect that is not executed in the character effect normally executed in the variable game effect or the jackpot game effect. It may be decided to execute a specialized special character effect or a special specific character effect having a lower selection rate than other specific character effects. As a special specific character effect, for example, it is conceivable to display an image for a selected character in a special costume or pose. In this way, as compensation for hindering the visibility of the specific character effect, even if the visibility of the specific character effect is hindered by executing the rare effect or the premier effect for the specific character, at that time It is possible to reduce emotions such as irritation and dissatisfaction of the player by executing a special specific character production.

In the error processing shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, it was decided to execute the specific character effect when there is an undigested round game after the error is cleared or when the ending effect is not executed. In addition to this condition, it may be decided by lottery whether to execute the specific character effect after the error is cleared. In this case, for example, a lottery may be performed before the execution of step S3016, or by deciding whether to set this flag on before setting the specific character effect carry-over execution flag to on in step S3006. , You may decide whether to execute a specific character effect by lottery. When deciding whether to execute the specific character effect by lottery, even if the visual recognition of the specific character effect is hindered by the error occurrence image 871, the specific character effect may or may not be executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise by executing the specific character effect after the display of the error occurrence image 871 is released, and to improve the interest of the jackpot game.

Further, in the above-mentioned error processing, when the error display period overlaps with the execution period of the specific character effect, that is, an error occurs during the execution of one round as a round game, or the execution of one round is started during the error occurrence. In this case, the specific character effect is executed after the error is cleared. However, if the overlap period between the error display period and the execution period of the specific character effect is short, for example, the overlap period is the maximum execution period per round of the specific character effect (maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 316 (for example, 30 seconds)). If it is 10% or less of the above, it is considered that the player is enjoying the specific character production for a considerable period of time. Therefore, if the overlapping period between the error display period and the execution period of the specific character effect is short, the specific character effect may not be executed after the error is cleared.

In the error processing of the present embodiment, while the error occurrence image 871 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the specific character effect, so that the recognition of the specific character effect is visually recognized by the error occurrence image 871. You can see if it was blocked. As a result, when the error occurrence image 871 obstructs the visibility of the specific character effect, it is possible to compensate for it. For example, in the present embodiment, when the display of the error-generating image 871 is canceled by eliminating the error when the visibility of the specific character effect is obstructed by the error-generating image 871, the blocked specific character effect is released from the error. In the later undigested round game and ending, the visual inhibition effect is executed. As a result, even when the priority display image obstructs the visibility of the specific character effect, the player can fully enjoy the specific character effect in the jackpot game.

In the above, the case where the visual recognition of the specific character effect is hindered by the error occurrence image 871 has been described, but the priority display image other than the error occurrence image 871 that notifies the information that needs to be displayed with priority over the character effect. The same effect can be obtained when the display timing of is overlapped with the execution timing of the character effect.

[Big hit game production processing]
Here, FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect processing executed in step S1912 of the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. In the jackpot game effect processing, the opening effect, ending effect, opening / closing execution mode effect, etc. determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 33 are executed.

<Step S3201>
In step S3201, the MPU 51 executes a ball ejection number display process for displaying on the symbol display unit 341 that the cumulative ball ejection number is equal to or greater than a specific number. The details of the ball output number display process will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

<Step S3202>
In step S3202, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect start flag set to be on in step S2708 in the command determination process of FIG. 30 is set to on, and when the jackpot game effect start flag is on ( Step S3202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3203, and when the jackpot game effect start flag is off (step S3202: No), the process proceeds to step S3207.

<Step S3203>
When the jackpot game production start flag is on (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state is a so-called first hit (step S3203). Here, the first hit is, for example, a jackpot when the lottery result in the jackpot game lottery becomes a jackpot in a normal non-time saving game state (a state in which the low probability mode is not the high frequency support mode). Then, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3204 when the jackpot is the first hit (step S3203: Yes), and shifts the process to step S3205 when the jackpot is not the first hit (step S3203: No).

<Step S3204>
When the jackpot that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is the first hit (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the first specific number in the RAM 512 (step S3204). Here, the first specific number is the minimum specific number when the specific number is displayed, and is set to, for example, 1000. Of course, the first specific number (minimum specific number) is not limited to 1000, and may be another number such as 500 or 2000.

<Steps S3205 and S3206>
The MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to off (step S3205), executes the opening effect start process (step S3206), and ends the jackpot game effect process. In the opening effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27 to execute the sound effect and the lamp effect as the opening effect determined in step S2803 of FIG. 33, and also causes the display control device 6 to perform the opening effect. A command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the image effect is transmitted.

<Step S3207>
When the jackpot game effect start flag is off (step S3202: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game effect start flag set to be on in step S2710 of the command determination process of FIG. 30 is set to on. (Step S3207), when the round game effect start flag is on (step S3207: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3208, and when the round game effect start flag is off (step S3207: No), the process is performed in step S3212. Move to.

<Step S3208>
In step S3208, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game is one round. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to end the opening effect. Whether or not the round game is one round can be determined, for example, based on the number of rounds stored in the RAM 512 when the round game effect start flag is set to ON in step S2710 in the command determination process of FIG. 30. .. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3209 when the round is one round (step S3208: Yes), and shifts the process to step S3210 when the round is not one round (step S3208: No).

<Step S3209>
When the round is one round (step S3208: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the opening effect end process (step S3209). That is, the MPU 51 executes the opening effect ending process when the round game start flag is turned on during the execution of the opening effect.

<Steps S3210 and S3211>
In step S3210, the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to off, further executes the round game effect (step S3211), and ends the jackpot game effect process. That is, the MPU 51 starts the round game effect corresponding to the round game among the open / close execution mode effects determined in step S2806 in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 33. Further, when it is determined in step S2808 in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 33 that the MPU 51 executes at least one of the promotion effect and the reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect, which are the visual inhibition effects in the round game, The visual inhibition effect is executed. The details of the round game effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

<Step S3212>
In step S3212, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending start flag set to be on in step S2714 in the command determination process of FIG. 30 is set to on, and when the ending start flag is on (step S3212: Yes). ), The process proceeds to step S3213, and when the ending start flag is off (step S3212: No), the process proceeds to step S3215.

<Steps S3213 and S3214>
When the ending start flag is on (step S3212: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending start flag to off (step S3213), executes the ending effect start process (step S3214), and ends the jackpot game effect process. To do. In the ending effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the effect means such as the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the symbol display unit 341 to start the ending effect determined in step S2807 of the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. Further, when the ending effect is reset in step S3018 in the error processing of FIG. 42, the ending effect reset by the error processing is executed instead of the ending effect determined by the jackpot game effect determination process.

The MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 to display an image related to the number of balls to be played, such as the number of balls to be played in the jackpot game and the total number of balls to be played in the consecutive villas, as an ending effect. In addition, the ending effect may display a definite image or the like that clearly indicates that the reserved villa will be executed. These images are determined, for example, in step S3214. Further, when the MPU 51 executes the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect in the ending effect separately from the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect as the visual inhibition effect, the hold consecutive villa confirmation image on the symbol display unit 341 is displayed before the start of the ending effect. The hold consecutive villa confirmation effect such as the display and the output of the hold consecutive villa confirmation sound from the speaker 26 is determined.

<Step S3215>
In step S3215, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect end flag set to be on in step S2716 in the command determination process of FIG. 30 is set to on, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is on ( Step S3215: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3216, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is off (step S3215: No), the jackpot game effect process ends.

<Steps S3216 and S3217>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S3215: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to off (step S3216) and executes the ending effect end process (step S3217), and the jackpot game The production process ends.

[Ball display effect processing]
Here, FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the payout display effect processing executed in step S3201 of the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 44. In the payout display effect processing, when the cumulative number of payouts due to winning the variable winning opening 316 in the jackpot game exceeds a specific number, a specific number of payouts is notified to notify that the cumulative number of payouts exceeds the specific number. Perform display production. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is expected that the specific number of balls will be displayed in one round in which the specific character effect for the selected character is executed, the process of displaying the specific number of balls in two rounds will be executed. To do.

By the way, in the conventional game machine, as described above, the overlay image notifying the result of the promotion effect and the confirmation of the reserved consecutive villa is displayed on the symbol display unit, so that the visibility of the effect on the character is hindered. To. Here, as the overlay image, for example, a ball ejection display image displayed on the symbol display unit every time a certain number of game balls are acquired in a jackpot game can be mentioned. Since this ball ejection display image is displayed every time the number of acquired game balls exceeds a certain number, the ball ejection display image is displayed at the timing when the effect of the player's favorite character is executed. Therefore, the visibility of the effect of the favorite character may be hindered. When such a situation occurs, the player cannot fully enjoy the production of the favorite character.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when it is expected that the payout display is executed in one round in which the specific character effect for the selected character is executed, the payout display is displayed in two rounds. The processing to be performed is realized. Therefore, the player can fully enjoy the specific character image production in the jackpot game without hindering the visual recognition of the specific character production for the selected character by the payout display.

<Step S3301>
In step S3301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the specific number payout display flag set to be turned on in step S2915 or S2916 of the visual inhibition effect determination process of FIG. 36 is set to on for the round game. To do. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it corresponds to a round game that executes a specific number of balls display effect. Here, when the specific number payout display flag is set to on for the round game (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3302 and turns off the specific number payout display flag. If is set to (step S3301: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3306.

<Step S3302>
In step S3302, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the cumulative number of balls to be counted in the ball ejection counting process of step S2712 in the command determination process of FIG. 30 is equal to or greater than a specific number. Here, the specific number is, for example, an integral multiple of 1000. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3303 when the cumulative number of balls is greater than or equal to the specific number (step S3302: Yes), and when the cumulative number of balls is less than the specific number (step S3302: No), the output is displayed. End the production process.

<Steps S3303 to 3305>
In step S3303, the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the round game effect screen 81 (see FIG. 40 (A)) to the specific number of balls display image display screen 86 (FIG. 40) in which the specific number of balls is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. (Refer to (B)), and further set the specific number payout display image display screen flag to on (step S3304), and turn off the specific number payout display flag set to be turned on for the round game. The setting (step S3305) is performed, and the payout display effect processing is completed. This specific number payout display image display screen flag is a flag indicating whether or not the specific number payout image is displayed (whether or not the specific number payout image effect is executed). Further, when the specific number of balls display image display screen flag is set to be turned on in step S3304, the time counting after the flag is turned on is started.

<Step S3306>
In step S3306, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the specific number payout display image display screen flag set to be on in step S3304 is set to on, and the specific number payout display image display screen flag is set to on. If this is the case (step S3306: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3307, and if the specific number of ball output display image display screen flag is set to off (step S3306: No), the ball output display effect process is performed. finish.

<Step S3307>
In step S3307, after the MPU 51 is shifted to the specific number payout display image display screen (after the specific number payout display image display screen flag is set to on), a predetermined time (for example, 1 second to 10) is set in advance. Determine if seconds) have passed. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the payout display effect has been executed for a predetermined time (whether a specific number of payout display images have been displayed for a predetermined time). When a predetermined time has elapsed from the transition to the specific number payout display image display screen (step S3307: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3308, and from the transition to the specific number payout display image display screen. If the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S3308: No), the payout display effect processing is terminated.

<Steps S3308 and S3309>
In step S3308, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the transition to the specific number payout display image display screen (step S3307: Yes), the MPU 51 displays the display screen from the specific number payout display image display screen 86 to produce a round game. The screen 81 (see FIGS. 40 (B) and 40 (C)) is returned to, and the specific number of payout display image display screen flag is set to off (step S3309), and the payout display effect process is completed.

[Round game production processing]
Here, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the round game effect processing executed in step S3211 of the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 44. In the round game effect processing, the round game effect in the open / close execution mode effect determined in step S2806 in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 33 and the visibility inhibition effect determined in step S2808 are executed in the round game.

<Steps S3401 and S3402>
In step S3401, the MPU 51 executes the round game effect of the corresponding round, and further sets the round game effect execution flag to ON (step S3402). The round game effect execution flag indicates whether or not the round game effect is being executed (whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode), and it is determined in step S3015 in the error processing of FIG. 42 whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode. Referenced for.

<Steps S3403 and S3404>
In step S3403, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the execution round of the promotion effect set in the RAM 512 in step S2906 of the visual inhibition effect determination process of FIG. If the MPU 51 is an execution round of the promotion effect (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the round game effect process after executing the promotion effect (step S3404). Here, the promotion effect is executed when the round game effect start flag is on (step S3207: Yes in FIG. 44), that is, at the start of the round game, but the promotion effect may be executed at other timings. .. For example, the promotion effect may be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the round game, or may be executed during the interval. If the visual inhibition effect is executed during the interval, it is possible to prevent the execution timing of the specific character effect executed in the round game from overlapping with the execution timing of the visual impairment effect, and the specific character effect is the visual inhibition effect. It is possible to prevent the visibility from being hindered.

On the other hand, when the MPU 51 is not the execution round of the promotion effect (step S3403: No), the process shifts to S3405 without executing the promotion effect.

<Steps S3405 and S3406>
In step S3405, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the execution round of the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect set in the RAM 512 in step S2911 of the visual inhibition effect determination process of FIG. In the case of the execution round of the reserved consecutive villa finalizing effect (step S3405: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the round game effect processing after executing the reserved consecutive villa finalizing effect (step S3406). Here, the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect is executed when the round game effect start flag is on (step S3207: Yes in FIG. 44), that is, at the start of the round game, as in the promotion effect, but at other timings. You may execute the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect at. For example, the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect may be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the round game, or may be executed during the interval.

On the other hand, if the MPU 51 is not an execution round of the reserved consecutive villa finalizing effect (step S3405: No), the MPU 51 ends the round game effect processing without executing the reserved consecutive villa finalizing effect.

As described above, in the game machine 10 according to the embodiment of the present invention, in the jackpot game, the specific character image effect mainly composed of the selected character selected by the player is at a different timing from the visual impairment effect. It is executed in a specific round game (fixed to one round in this embodiment). Therefore, the player can fully enjoy the specific character image production in the jackpot game without hindering the visibility of the specific character image production.

Further, in the game machine 10, a specific character image effect is executed in a specific round such as one round. Therefore, since the player can grasp in advance the round game in which the specific character image effect is executed, it is possible to prevent, for example, paying attention to the variable winning opening 316 and overlooking the specific character image effect for the selected character.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, while the error occurrence image 871 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the specific character effect, and the error occurrence image 871 is used to determine the specific character effect. When the display of the error-occurring image 871 is canceled by eliminating the error when the visual recognition of is hindered, the hindered specific character effect is executed after the error display is cleared. As a result, even when the error occurrence image 871 obstructs the visual recognition of the specific character effect, the player can fully enjoy the specific character effect in the jackpot game.

[Other Embodiments]
Hereinafter, other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. Further, in the following other embodiments, the description of the same configuration as that of the game machine 10 described in the first embodiment described above and the same steps as the processing procedure will be omitted. It is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function of the above-mentioned first embodiment and the following other embodiments.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, in the jackpot game, a specific character effect mainly composed of a selected character selected by the player is fixedly executed in one round, and a visual inhibition effect is executed in a game other than one round. Was explained. That is, in the first embodiment, in the jackpot game, the specific character effect (selection-based image effect) mainly composed of the selected character (specific-selection subject) selected by the player is executed at a timing different from the visual impairment effect. An example of the case where it is done was explained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of the specific character effect and the execution timing of the visual impairment effect are determined, and if there is an overlap between these execution timings, the execution timing of one of the effects is redetermined. Is different from the embodiment of.

In the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when at least a part of the first timing for executing the specific character effect and the second timing for executing the visual impairment effect overlap, one of the first timing and the second timing Is redetermined to a timing at which the first timing and the second timing do not overlap. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specific character effect from being hindered by the visual hindrance effect in advance. Further, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of the specific character effect is randomly determined without fixing the specific character effect to one round, which is a specific unit game, as in the first embodiment described above. Random. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the symbol display unit 341 in order to confirm the specific character effect, so that the effect on the character other than the selected character can be positively appreciated, and the goodness of the character other than the selected character can be appreciated. You will be given the opportunity to confirm.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 49, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIGS. 47 and 48 show an opening / closing execution mode effect determining table for 5R and an opening / closing execution mode effect determining table for 16R referred to in the jackpot game effect determining process executed by the voice lamp control device of the present embodiment, respectively. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example, and FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a visual impairment effect determination process executed by the voice lamp control device of the present embodiment.

Since the present embodiment is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that the execution timing of the specific character effect is randomly determined as described above, the game effect determination process is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment. 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table (see FIG. 47) and 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table (see FIG. 48), and a procedure (FIG. 49) is different.

As shown in FIG. 47, the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 5R of the present embodiment is defined so that the selected character can be determined in any of 1 round to 5 rounds. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table of the present embodiment is defined so that the selected character can be determined in any of 1 round to 16 rounds.

As shown in FIG. 49, the visual inhibition effect determination process of the present embodiment provisionally determines a round game for executing the promotion effect as the visual inhibition effect (step S3501), and then executes the provisionally set promotion effect. When the game does not overlap with the round game for executing the specific character effect (step S3502: No), the temporarily set round game for the promotion effect is set as the round game for executing the promotion effect as it is (step S3503). On the other hand, when the temporarily set round game overlaps with the round game for executing the specific character effect (step S3502: Yes), the round game for executing the promotion effect is temporarily set again (step S3501).

Similarly, after the round game for executing the reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect as the visual inhibition effect is tentatively determined (step S2907), the round game for executing the temporarily set reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect executes the promotion effect. On the condition that they do not overlap (step S2908: No), and if they do not overlap with the round game that executes the specific character effect (step S3504: No), the temporarily set promotion effect round game is held as it is. (Step S3505). On the other hand, when the temporarily set round game overlaps with the round game that executes the promotion effect or the round game that executes the specific character effect (in step S2908 or S3502: Yes), the round game that executes the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect is It is temporarily set again (step S2907).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the round game that is expected to exceed the specified number of balls is displayed and overlaps with the round game that executes the specific character effect (step S2912: Yes), the current round game is the final round game. In the case of (step S3506: Yes), that is, when there is no undigested round game, a setting is made to execute a specific number of payout display at the ending (step S3507). On the other hand, if the current round game is not the final round game (step S3506: No), that is, if there is an undigested round game, a specific number of balls are displayed in the next round game of the round game that executes the specific character effect. Is set for the round game to be executed (step S3508).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the promotion effect and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect as the visual impairment effect and the round game for executing the specific character effect are determined in duplicate, the visual impairment effect is determined. The round game to execute is redetermined to the round game that does not overlap with the specific character production. In addition, the ball output display effect as the visual impairment effect is also executed in the next round game or ending after the execution of the specific character effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specific character effect from being hindered by the visual hindrance effect in advance. In addition, by determining the round game to execute the specific character effect and re-determining the round game to execute the visibility obstruction effect as necessary, the specific character effect is not executed by being fixed to the specific round game. , A loud game that randomly executes a specific character effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the symbol display unit 341 in order to confirm the specific character effect, so that the effect on the character other than the selected character can be positively appreciated, and the goodness of the character other than the selected character can be appreciated. You will be given the opportunity to confirm.

In the present embodiment, the specific character effect is determined first, and then the promotion effect and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect are randomly determined, but the promotion effect and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect are not executed. The timing may be intentionally determined. For example, a round game in which a specific character effect is not executed may be extracted, and a round game in which a promotion effect or a hold consecutive villa confirmation effect is executed may be determined from the extracted round games. Even in this case, it is possible to avoid in advance that the specific character effect is obstructed by the visual impairment effect. In addition, it is not necessary to determine whether the execution timing of the promotion effect or the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect overlaps with the execution timing of the specific character effect, and it is not necessary to redetermine the promotion effect or the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect. The processing load on the MPU 51 is reduced.

In addition, the visual inhibition effect such as the promotion effect and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect is determined first, and then the specific character effect is determined, and when the execution timing of the specific character effect overlaps with the execution timing of the visual impairment effect, it is specified. The execution timing of the character effect may be redetermined. Furthermore, when the current round game is the final round game, the payout display effect is executed at the ending, but when there is no undigested round game, the payout display effect is not executed at the ending. May be omitted.

[Third Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a case where the specific character effect cannot be visually recognized by displaying an error has been described (see FIG. 43 (B)). On the other hand, the present embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that an error display is performed so that the specific character effect can be visually recognized.

Hereinafter, the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51, focusing on the differences from the game machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of an error processing procedure executed by the voice lamp control device, and FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example of an error display in the symbol display unit in the error processing of the present embodiment. ..

As shown in FIG. 50, in the error processing of the present embodiment, when an error occurs (step S3001: Yes), it is determined whether or not the specific character effect is being executed (step S3601), and the specific character effect is produced. When is being executed (step S3601: Yes), the error display image 871 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (step S3002), and the specific character effect is reduced and displayed as shown in FIG. 51 (step). S3602). The reduction ratio and arrangement of the specific character effect are not particularly limited as long as the visibility of the specific character effect is not hindered.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the error display image 871 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 so that the specific character effect can be visually recognized. That is, the specific character effect is reduced from the display size before displaying the error display image 871 and executed in a predetermined part of the error display image 871, so that the error display image 871 is displayed as a symbol. Even if it is displayed on the unit 341, it can be visually recognized. As a result, the player can enjoy the selected character image effect in the jackpot game even when the error display image 871 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

In the present embodiment, the specific character effect is reduced and executed in a part of the error display image 871, but as shown in FIG. 52, an error occurs in a part of the display screen 81 of the specific character effect. The display image 872 may be displayed. In the example of FIG. 52, the error display image 872 is displayed in the center of the upper part of the round game effect screen 81, but the position where the error display image 872 is displayed is on the left side as long as the visual recognition of the specific character effect is not hindered. , Right portion, lower portion, corner portion, etc., may be other than the positions shown in FIG. Further, the size of the error display image 872 is not particularly limited as long as it does not hinder the visibility of the specific character effect.

Here, as the error, as described above, there is a normal error that does not need to be notified immediately after an error such as a ball jam error occurs. In such a normal error, the urgency of notifying the occurrence of the error is lower than that of the fraud detection error. Therefore, even if the error display and the execution of the specific character effect are performed in parallel as in the present embodiment, there is a particular problem. Absent.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, when the visibility of the specific character effect is hindered by the occurrence of an error, the case where the specific character effect is executed in the jackpot game in which the error occurs after the error is cleared has been described. On the other hand, in the first embodiment described above, when the visibility of the specific character effect is hindered by the occurrence of an error, the specific character effect is executed in the next big hit game instead of the jackpot game in which the error occurred. Is different from the embodiment of.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process executed by the voice lamp control device of the present embodiment, and FIG. 54 is an error process executed by the voice lamp control device of the present embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of.

As shown in FIG. 53, in the jackpot game effect determination process of the present embodiment, when the specific character effect stock flag is on (step S3701: Yes), the timing for executing the specific character effect as the stock effect determination process is determined. The flag. This specific character effect stock flag triggers the transition to the previous jackpot game when the visibility of the specific character effect is hindered by the occurrence of an error in the error processing shown in FIG. 54 (step S3005: Yes). It is set to ON on the condition that the determination result is a probability variation jackpot (step S3802).

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, as compensation when the visual recognition of the specific character effect is hindered by displaying the error display image on the symbol display unit 341 in the previous jackpot game, the visual recognition is performed in the special game. The specific character effect is executed for the amount of the obstruction. As a result, even if the error display image obstructs the visibility of the specific character effect, the player can fully enjoy the selected character image effect in the next jackpot game.

In particular, if the error display image obstructs the visibility of the specific character effect in the probabilistic jackpot game, the specific character effect that is obstructed in the next jackpot game is executed, and the game is a jackpot game. As a privilege of the above, the selected character image effect for which the visual recognition is hindered is executed, and the player can enjoy the privilege. In addition, it is hard to say that the privilege when the visual recognition of the specific character production is hindered by displaying the error display image on the symbol display unit 341 on the condition that the jackpot game is executed is not a privilege. It can be prevented from being done earlier.

Further, in the stock effect determination process in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 53, for example, in one jackpot game, in addition to the specific character effect determined by the jackpot game, a specific character effect executed by the stock is added. It may be decided to execute the specific character effect twice or more. In that case, the specific character effect determined by the jackpot game and the specific character effect executed by the stock may be determined as different effects from the specific character effect executed by the stock, and the specific character executed twice or more. One of the effects may be executed at the opening, and the remaining specific character effects may be executed in the round game.

If the specific character effect is determined in this way, if the error display image obstructs the visibility of the specific character effect in the previous jackpot game, the selected character image effect is combined with the other specific character effect in the jackpot game as compensation. Is performed as a different effect. Therefore, when the same specific character effect is executed twice or more, it is possible to suppress the feeling of getting tired of the specific character effect. In particular, by executing the specific character effect executed as compensation at the opening, the feeling of getting tired of the specific character effect is felt as compared with the case where the same specific character effect is executed twice or more in a plurality of round games. You can effectively suppress holding. In addition, the player can enjoy the compensation due to the obstruction of the visibility of the specific character effect by the error display image as a privilege that the effect is different from that of other selected character image effects. Can be enjoyed more.

Further, the specific character effect executed by the stock may be executed as a special specific character effect having a low application rate, or as a special specific character effect executed only as a specific character effect at the time of stock. In this way, a special specific character effect is executed in the next jackpot game as compensation for hindering the visibility of the specific character effect. Therefore, even when the visibility of the specific character effect is hindered, the emotions such as irritation and dissatisfaction of the player at that time can be reduced by executing the special specific character effect.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, in the jackpot game, a case where a specific character effect mainly composed of a selected character selected by the player is executed in one round is described.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the effect executed at a predetermined timing in the variable game that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state (in the present embodiment, the symbol display unit 341 displays the main symbol at the stop display timing). It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the effect on the character in the final image game effect (triggered game image effect) that has been executed is executed in at least one of the opening and one round.

By the way, in a conventional game machine, in a jackpot game, in addition to a moving image such as a PV (promotion video) of a character appearing in a variable game effect, there is a character effect that displays a still image such as a character introduction image.

However, in the conventional game machine, the production for the character in the jackpot game is randomly determined, and the production character (specific production main body) that is mainly displayed in the reach production (specific production main image production) in the variable game production. ) Was not related. On the other hand, the player may feel a considerable attachment and gratitude to the character in the variable game that triggered the big hit.

On the other hand, in the game machine according to the present embodiment, the effect character effect for the effect character in the trigger game image effect that was executed at a predetermined timing in the variable game that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state ((( The special game) specific effect-based image effect) is executed in at least one of the opening and one round. Therefore, the effect character effect is executed in the jackpot game in a relatively short time after the end of the variable game, in other words, in a relatively short time after the end of the final image game effect in the variable game. Therefore, the player can enjoy the production character in the final image game production even in the jackpot game, with the lingering sound such as the reach effect in the variable game that triggered the jackpot remaining. As a result, the production character can be further enjoyed in the jackpot game.

Hereinafter, the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57, focusing on the differences from the game machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 56 is referred to in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 55. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot game character effect data table, and FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of an open / close execution mode effect determination table referred to in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 55.

In the jackpot game effect determination process of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 55, the variable game for the variable game that triggered the transition to the jackpot game before determining the opening effect and the opening / closing execution mode effect (before step S2803). The final image game effect type that was executed at the timing when the main symbol in the effect is stopped and displayed, and the effect character in the final image game effect are specified (step S3901).

Then, the MPU 51 refers to the jackpot game character effect data table shown in FIG. 56, and determines the effect to be executed at the opening (step S2802). Further, the MPU 51 refers to the jackpot character effect data table shown in FIG. 56 and the open / close execution mode effect determination table shown in FIG. 57 to determine the effect to be executed in the open / close execution mode (steps S3903 and S3904).

Here, the jackpot character effect data table shown in FIG. 56 is used to determine the character type to appear in the opening effect of the jackpot game and to determine the character type for determining the scenario in the round game effect of the jackpot game. The MPU 51 is referred to in steps S3902 and S3904 in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. In this jackpot game character production data table, the character type to appear in the opening production and the round according to the final image game production type (reach production type) that was executed at the timing when the main symbol in the variable game is stopped and displayed. The character type for determining the game production scenario is defined. In addition, the character type for determining the round game production scenario is defined according to whether or not the jackpot type (probability variation jackpot and normal jackpot) and the reserved consecutive villa confirmation production are executed.

Specifically, in the variable game effect that triggered the jackpot game, when the final image game effect is the super reach effect Y1 to Y5, the opening character is not the effect character in the super reach effect Y1 to Y5. A non-selected character that is not a selected character among the characters 1 to 4 is determined. That is, when the final image game effect is the super reach effect Y1 to Y5, the effect character effect for the effect character is not executed and the specific character effect for the selected character is not executed at the opening.

On the other hand, when the final image game effect is the super reach effect Y1 to Y5, the effect characters 5 to 9 in the super reach effect Y1 to Y5 are determined as the characters for determining the scenario of the round game effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 57, in the open / close execution mode effect determination table referred to in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 55, these are used according to the characters 1 to 9 for determining the scenario of the round game effect. An effect scenario table is set individually for characters 1 to 9. In the effect scenario table for any of the characters 1 to 9, the scenario in which the effect characters 5 to 9 in the super reach effects Y1 to Y5 are executed in one round of the round game is determined. For example, when the final image game effect is the super reach effect Y1, the effect character effect for the character 9 is round-gamed according to the "effect scenario table for character 9" for the character 9 which is the effect character in the super reach effect Y1. The scenario to be executed in one round of production is decided.

Returning to the description of FIG. 56, when the final image game effect is the special reach effect Z1 to Z5, any of the effect characters 1 to 4 in the special reach effect Z1 to Z5, or the characters 1 to 20 (characters 1 to 20) as the opening character. Everyone) is decided. That is, when the final image game effect is the super reach effect Y1 to Y5, the effect character effect for the effect character is executed at the opening, and when there are a plurality of effect characters, the effect character effect in which those characters are displayed is executed. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the final image game effect is the special reach effect Z1 to Z5, whether the determination result that triggered the transition to the jackpot game is a probabilistic jackpot as a character for determining the scenario of the round game effect. The selected character is determined when the reserved consecutive villa is confirmed, and it is not a probabilistic jackpot, and it is not the selected character among characters 5 to 9 (other than characters 1 to 4) when the reserved consecutive villa is not confirmed. The non-selected character is determined. That is, when the final image game effect is the super reach effect Y1 to Y5, in the open / close execution mode, the specific character effect for the selected character is one round of the round game when the probability variation jackpot or the reserved consecutive villa is confirmed. Is executed only in (see FIG. 57). In this case, if the effect character and the selected character are the same, the specific character effect is executed in one round as the effect character effect.

When the final image game effect is the normal reach effect X1 to X5, the selected character is determined as the opening character and the character for determining the scenario of the round game effect. On the other hand, in the normal reach effects X1 to X5, the selected character is determined as the effect character. That is, when the final image game effect is the normal reach effect X1 to X5, the effect character effect (specific selection character) for the effect character (selected character) in the normal reach effect X1 to X5 is performed in both the opening and one round of the round game. Will be executed. In other words, when the final image game effect is the normal reach effect X1 to X5 and the effect character and the selected character are the same, the specific character effect (effect character) for the selected character is used in both the opening and the round game. The effect character effect) is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the character in the opening effect is determined according to the reach type and the effect character type in the final image game effect, and the scenario effect in the round game (character effect in one round) is determined. The character to play is determined according to the reach type, the effect character type, the jackpot type (probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot) in the final image game production, and whether or not the reserved consecutive villa is executed. The effect determined in this way is executed by the MPU 51 in the jackpot game. As a result, in the present embodiment, the effect character effect for the effect character in the final image game effect is executed in at least one of the opening and one round, and the execution in other than the opening and one round is restricted. As a result, the jackpot game can be enjoyed in a fashion that reflects the final image game production in the variable game that triggered the transition to the jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, the production character production is executed in at least one of the opening and one round, and the execution in other than the opening and one round is restricted. However, for example, when the reserved consecutive villa is confirmed, the probability changes. When the game situation is advantageous to the player, such as in the case of a jackpot game, the effect character effect may be exceptionally executed at a timing other than the opening and one round. As a result, the player can enjoy the effect character effect a plurality of times as a privilege in the case of an advantageous game situation.

Further, when the effect character in the final image game effect and the selected character are the same as in the normal reach effects X1 to X5, when the effect character effect is executed in both the opening and the first round, the opening and the first round are performed. It is conceivable to execute the effect character effect as a different effect. In this case, the player can enjoy different effects for the effect character (selected character) twice in the opening and one round.

Further, in the present embodiment, the round game effect scenario is determined according to the reach type, but the round game effect scenario may be determined regardless of the reach type.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the trigger game image effect is the final image game effect that was executed at the timing when the main symbol is stopped and displayed has been described, but it is executed at a timing other than the timing when the main symbol is stopped and displayed. The specific character effect for the character in the opportunity game image effect may be executed in at least one of the opening and one round.

Further, in the present embodiment, the scenario of the round game effect in the open / close execution mode is determined based on the open / close execution mode effect determination table shown in FIG. 57, but the character for determining the scenario of the round game effect is selected. In the case of a character, the effect scenario (round game effect) in the open / close execution mode may be determined based on the open / close execution mode effect determination table (see FIGS. 47 and 48) in the second embodiment described above. .. In this case, the round game in which the specific character effect for the selected character is executed in the open / close execution mode is determined even if it is not one round (two rounds or later). In other words, when the effect character is the same as the selected character, as in the case where the final image game effect is the normal reach effect X1 to X5 effect, the effect character effect (specific character effect) for the effect character (selected character) is It is executed in round games other than the opening and the first round, for example, the second and subsequent rounds. As a result, in order to confirm the effect character effect (specific character effect) for the effect character (selected character), the symbol display unit 341 can be focused on in the round game, so that a character other than the effect character (selected character) can be focused on. It is possible to positively appreciate the effect on the character, and an opportunity to confirm the goodness of a character other than the effect character (selected character) is given. If conditions other than the case where the production character is the same as the selected character are satisfied, for example, when the reach type is a special reach production, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game is a probable change jackpot. In such a case, the effect character may be executed in the round game after the second round.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment described above, the character in the opening effect is determined according to the reach type and the effect character type in the final image game effect, and the effect scenario in the round game (character effect in one round) is determined. The character to be used is determined according to the reach type in the final image game production, the production character type, the jackpot type (probability variation jackpot and normal jackpot), and whether or not the reserved consecutive villa is executed, and the character for the production character in the final image game production The case where the effect character effect is executed in at least one of the opening and one round has been described.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the character of the opening effect and the character for determining the effect scenario (character effect in one round) in the round game are defined according to the reach type and the effect character type in the final image game effect. Although it is common to the fifth embodiment described above in that it is done, not only the character for determining the production scenario (character production in one round) in the round game but also the character in the opening production is the jackpot. It differs from the above-mentioned fifth embodiment in that it is defined according to the jackpot type (probability variable jackpot and normal jackpot) in the lottery result that triggered the transition to the game.

In the present embodiment, the character of the opening effect and the character for determining the effect scenario (character effect in one round) in the round game are, in addition to the reach type and the effect character type in the final image game effect, the jackpot game. It is determined according to the jackpot type in the lottery result that triggered the transition to, and the jackpot game production so determined is executed in the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the jackpot game in a fashion that reflects the lottery result (game state of the jackpot game) for the variable game that triggered the transition to the jackpot game. For example, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot game state that is more advantageous for the player, if a jackpot is achieved by a specific reach effect (in this embodiment, the normal reach effects X1 to X5 of the selected character (see FIG. 58)), the opening and one round. In, the effect character effect (specific character effect) for the effect character (selected character) of the normal reach effect, which is the final image game effect, is executed. As a result, the player can continuously enjoy the effect on the effect character (selected character) in the jackpot game from the final image game effect while leaving the lingering sound in the case of the advantageous probability variation jackpot game.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot game character effect data table referred to in the jackpot game effect determination process executed by the voice lamp control device of the present embodiment. In FIG. 58, the OP effect is an abbreviation for the opening effect, and the R scenario is an abbreviation for the round game effect scenario.

In the jackpot game character effect data table shown in FIG. 58, for example, in the normal reach effects X1 to X5, the effect character in the final image game effect of the variable game is the same as the selected character, which triggers the transition to the jackpot game state. When the judgment result for the variable game is a probabilistic jackpot, a specific character effect (effect character effect) for the selected character (effect character) is determined at the opening, and the selected character (effect character) is selected as the character for selecting the round game effect scenario. ) Is determined. That is, when the production character in the final image game production of the variable game is the same as the selected character, the production character (selected character) in the final variable game in both the opening and the first round, provided that it is a probability variation jackpot. Character effect (specific character effect) is executed. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, neither the effect character nor the selected character is displayed in the opening effect (specific character effect (effect character effect) is not executed), and the effect character (selected character) is used as a round game effect scenario. ) Is selected.

Further, in the super reach effects Y1 to Y5 and the special reach effects Z1 to Z5, when the lottery result for the variable game that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state is a probabilistic jackpot, the final image game effect is produced at the opening. The effect for the character is determined, and the effect scenario for the selected character is selected as the round game effect scenario. On the contrary, when the lottery result for the variable game that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state is a normal jackpot, the selected character is determined as the character in the opening effect, and the round game effect scenario is determined. The production character is determined as the character of. By determining the character of the opening effect and the character for determining the effect scenario (character effect in one round) in the round game in this way, also in this embodiment, the effect for the selected character in one of the opening and one round is determined. And the final image of the variable game. The effect on the effect character in the game effect is executed, and the execution other than the opening and one round is restricted. As a result, the player can predict the jackpot type, and can enjoy the jackpot game by paying attention to the character of the opening effect and the character of the effect executed in one round while considering the reach type. ..

In the present embodiment, the effect character effect (specific character) is executed in at least one of the opening and one round, and the execution in other than the opening and one round is restricted. However, for example, when the promotion effect is executed, When the game situation is advantageous to the player, such as when the reserved consecutive villa is confirmed, the effect character effect may be exceptionally executed at a timing other than the opening and the first round.

Further, in the super reach effects Y1 to Y5 and the special reach effects Z1 to Z5, the effect character may be the same as the selected character, but if the effect character is the same as the selected character, one round of the opening and opening / closing execution modes The production character production (specific character production) is executed in both of the above. In this case, it is conceivable that the effect character effect (specific character effect) is executed only in one of the opening and open / close execution modes.

Further, in the final image game production, as in the case where the normal reach effects X1 to X5 are executed as the final image game production in the variable game when the lottery result that triggered the transition to the jackpot game is a probabilistic jackpot. When the effect character and the selected character are the same, and the effect character effect is executed in both the opening and the first round, it is conceivable that the effect character effect is executed as a different effect in the opening and the first round. In this case, the player can enjoy different effects for the effect character (selected character) twice in the opening and one round.

Further, in the present embodiment, the round game production scenario is determined according to the reach type, but the round game production scenario may be determined regardless of the reach type.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the trigger game image effect is the final image game effect that was executed at the timing when the main symbol is stopped and displayed has been described, but it is executed at a timing other than the timing when the main symbol is stopped and displayed. The specific character effect for the character in the opportunity game image effect may be executed in at least one of the opening and one round.

[7th Embodiment]
In the sixth embodiment described above, the character in the opening effect and the character for determining the effect scenario in the round game (character effect in one round) are drawn by lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game. The case specified according to the jackpot type (probability variable jackpot and normal jackpot) in the result was explained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, the character in the opening effect and the effect scenario in the round game (character effect in one round) are defined separately for the 5R jackpot and the 16R jackpot. It is different from the embodiment of 6. That is, in the present embodiment, the character in the opening effect and the effect scenario in the round game (character effect in one round) are defined according to the number of jackpot rounds.

In the present embodiment as well, as in the sixth embodiment described above, the character in the opening effect and the character for determining the effect scenario in the round game (character effect in one round) trigger the transition to the jackpot game. It is defined according to the jackpot type in the lottery result, and the jackpot game production determined in this way is executed in the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the jackpot game in a fashion that reflects the lottery result (game state of the jackpot game) of the variable game that triggered the transition to the jackpot game. For example, in the case of a 16R (probability variation) jackpot game state, which is more advantageous for the player, if a jackpot is achieved by a specific reach effect (normal reach effect X1 to X5 of the selected character in this embodiment), the opening and the normal reach in one round. The effect character (specific character effect) for the effect character effect (selected character) of the effects X1 to X5 is executed. As a result, when the 16R (probability variation) jackpot game is advantageous, the player can continue to enjoy the jackpot game from the final image game production while leaving the lingering sound.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot game character effect data table referred to in the jackpot game effect determination process executed by the voice lamp control device of the present embodiment.

In the jackpot game character effect data table shown in FIG. 59, for example, in the normal reach effects X1 to X5, when the effect character in the final image game effect of the variable game is the same as the selected character, the trigger for the transition to the jackpot game state. When the lottery result for the variable game is a 16R jackpot, a specific character effect (effect character effect) for the selected character (effect character) is determined at the opening, and the selected character (directed character effect) is selected as the character for selecting the round game effect scenario. The production character) is determined. That is, when the production character in the final image game production of the variable game is the same as the selected character, the production character (selected character) in the final variable game in both the opening and the first round, provided that it is a 16R jackpot. Character effect (specific character effect) is executed. On the other hand, when the lottery result is a 5R jackpot, the effect on the selected character or the effect character in the final image game effect is not determined at the opening, and the selected character (effect character) is selected as the character for selecting the round game effect scenario. ) Is determined.

Further, in the super reach effects Y1 to Y5 and the special reach effects Z1 to Z5, when the lottery result for the variable game that triggered the transition to the big hit game state is a 5R big hit, the final image game effect is produced at the opening. The effect for the character is determined, and the effect scenario for the selected character is selected as the round game effect scenario. On the contrary, when the lottery result for the variable game that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state is 16R jackpot, the selected character is determined as the character in the opening effect, and the round game effect scenario is determined. The production character is determined as the character of. By determining the character of the opening effect and the character for determining the scenario effect (character effect in one round) in the round game in this way, also in this embodiment, the effect for the selected character in one of the opening and one round is determined. And the final image of the variable game The effect on the effect character in the game effect is executed, and the execution is restricted except for the opening and one round, so that the player can predict the jackpot type. As a result, the player can enjoy the jackpot game by paying attention to the character of the opening and the production executed in one round while considering the reach type.

In the present embodiment, the production character production is executed in at least one of the opening and one round, and the execution in other than the opening and one round is restricted. However, for example, when the promotion production is executed, the reserved consecutive villa is used. When the game situation is advantageous to the player, such as when it is confirmed, the effect character effect may be exceptionally executed at a timing other than the opening and one round.

Further, in the super reach effects Y1 to Y5 and the special reach effects Z1 to Z5, the effect character may be the same as the selected character, but if the effect character is the same as the selected character, one round of the opening and opening / closing execution modes The production character production (specific character production) is executed in both of the above. In this case, it is conceivable that the effect character effect (specific character effect) is executed only in one of the opening and open / close execution modes.

Further, in the final image game production, as in the case where the normal reach effects X1 to X5 are executed as the final image game production in the variable game when the lottery result that triggered the transition to the jackpot game is a 16R jackpot. When the effect character and the selected character are the same, and the effect character effect is executed in both the opening and the first round, it is conceivable that the effect character effect is executed as a different effect in the opening and the first round. In this case, the player can enjoy different effects for the effect character (selected character) twice in the opening and one round.

Further, in the present embodiment, the round game production scenario is determined according to the reach type, but the round game production scenario may be determined regardless of the reach type.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the trigger game image effect is the final image game effect that was executed at the timing when the main symbol is stopped and displayed has been described, but it is executed at a timing other than the timing when the main symbol is stopped and displayed. The specific character effect for the character in the opportunity game image effect may be executed in at least one of the opening and one round.

[8th Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, in the visual impairment effect of the jackpot game effect determination process, the cumulative number of balls is estimated, and the specific number of ball output display effect, which is the visual impairment effect, is a specific character whose main character is the selected character. The case where it is prevented from being executed during the execution of the production was explained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the cumulative number of balls to be played is monitored in real time to display the number of balls to be played during the execution of the jackpot game, and the specific number of balls to be displayed is not executed during the execution of the specific character effect. In that respect, it differs from the first embodiment described above.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the payout display effect processing executed by the voice lamp control device.

As shown in FIG. 60, in the ball ejection display effect processing of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the ball ejection display carry-over flag set to be on in step S4005 described later is set to on (step S4001). The payout display carry-over flag is a flag for displaying a specific number of payout display images after the end of the specific character effect, and when the cumulative number of payouts exceeds the specific number during execution of the specific character effect (steps S4002 and S4004). Yes), it is set to on (step S4005).

When the payout display carry-over flag is set to off (step S4001: No), the cumulative number of payouts counted in the payout count process of step S2712 in the command determination process of FIG. 30 is the Nth specific number or more. Judge whether or not. Here, N is a positive integer, for example, the Nth specific number is 1000N.

Here, in the ball payout counting process of the first embodiment described above, only the number of prize balls for winning the variable winning opening 316 is added as the cumulative ball payout number. On the other hand, in the ball ejection counting process of the present embodiment, as the cumulative ball ejection number, the difference between the cumulative ball ejection number for winning the variable winning opening 316 and the launching game ball number (out ball number) during the jackpot game. The so-called difference number of balls is adopted, and when the difference number of balls exceeds a specific number, a specific number of balls is displayed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the cumulative number of balls to be ejected is counted by differentiating the number of launched game balls (the number of out balls) during the jackpot game, the round game in which the cumulative number of balls to be ejected is equal to or more than a specific number is accurately estimated. Since it is not easy to do so, the cumulative number of balls to be played is monitored in real time in consideration of this point, so that the balls are displayed during the execution of the jackpot game.

When the cumulative number of balls to be ejected is equal to or greater than the Nth specific number (step S4002: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4003, and when the cumulative number of balls to be ejected is less than the Nth specific number (step S4002: No). The process proceeds to step S3306.

When the cumulative number of balls to be ejected is equal to or greater than the Nth specific number (step S4002: Yes), the specific number set in the RAM 512 is updated from the Nth specific number to the N + 1 specific number (step S4003). That is, the MPU 51 changes the number of balls to be determined in the specific number of balls display to the next specific number. Here, the N + 1 specific number is, for example, the N specific number + 1000 (= 1000 (N + 1)).

Next, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the specific character effect is being executed (step S4004). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display timing of the specific number of balls display image overlaps with the execution timing of the specific character effect.

When the specific character effect is being executed (step S4004: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the payout display carry-over flag to on (step S4005), and ends the payout display effect process. That is, by setting the payout display carry-over flag to ON, the MPU 51 carries over the display of a specific number of payout display images until the specific character effect is completed.

On the other hand, when the specific character effect is not being executed (step S4004: No), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen of the symbol display unit 341 to the specific number output display image display screen 86 (see FIG. 40 (B)) (step). S3903). That is, when the specific character effect is not being executed, the MPU 51 displays a specific number of balls to be displayed when the cumulative number of balls is equal to or greater than the specific number.

On the other hand, when the payout display carry-over flag is set to ON (step S4001: Yes), it is determined whether or not the specific character effect has been completed (step S4006). When the specific character effect is completed (step S4006: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the payout display carry-over flag to off (step S4007), and displays the display screen of the symbol display unit 341 as a specific number of payout display image display screen. Transition to 86 (see FIG. 40 (B)) (step S3903).

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the specific character effect is executed during the execution of the specific number of balls display effect before the specific number of balls display effect which is the visual inhibition effect is executed, and the specific number of balls display effect is performed. If it is determined that the specific character effect is to be executed during the execution, the specific number of balls to be displayed is displayed after the specific character effect is completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specific character effect from being hindered by the display effect of displaying the specific number of balls.

[9th Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, in the jackpot game effect determination process, the open / close execution mode effect is determined and then the visual inhibition effect is determined, and the visual inhibition effect is executed during the execution of the specific character effect with the selected character as the main character. I explained the case to prevent it from being done.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode effect is determined after the visual impairment effect is determined, so that the visual impairment effect is not executed during the execution of the specific character effect in which the selected character is the main character. It is different from the embodiment of 1.

Hereinafter, the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63, focusing on the differences from the game machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process executed by the voice lamp control device of the present embodiment, and FIGS. 62 and 63 are respectively referred to in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 5R and the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 16R.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the jackpot game effect determining process of the present embodiment, it is necessary to execute the visual inhibition effect determining process (step S4101) for determining the visual impairment effect, and then determine the opening / closing execution mode effect. The process is executed (steps S4102 to S4105).

In the visual inhibition effect determination process (step S4101), unlike the first embodiment described above, the visual inhibition effect can be determined including one round. However, a round game for executing the visual impairment effect is determined so that the promotion effect and the pending consecutive villa confirmation effect are not executed in the same round, that is, a plurality of visual impairment effects are not executed in the same round.

When the round game for executing the visual impairment effect is determined (step S4101), the MPU 51 determines the round game for executing the specific character effect for the selected character (step S4102). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines to execute the specific character effect in a round game that does not overlap with the round game that executes the visual impairment effect, that is, a round game that does not execute the visual impairment effect. For example, when a specific number of balls are displayed in 2 rounds, a hold consecutive villa confirmation effect is executed in 3 rounds, and a promotion effect is executed in 4 rounds, the MPU 51 performs 1 specific character effect that does not execute the visual impairment effect. Decide to run in rounds or five rounds. Whether the specific character effect is executed in the 1st round or the 5th round is determined by a lottery or the like.

The MPU 51 may decide to execute the specific character effect in one round when the visual impairment effect is not executed in one round. Further, the specific character effect may be executed in both the opening effect and the open / close execution mode effect.

When the MPU 51 determines the round game for executing the specific character effect (step S4102), the jackpot type and the selected character are specified (step S4103), and the round game for executing the specific character effect, the jackpot type, and the selected character type are selected. Then, the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for determining the effect to be executed in each round game in the opening / closing execution mode is determined (step S4104).

Here, FIG. 62 shows an opening / closing execution mode effect determining table for 5R, and FIG. 63 shows an opening / closing execution mode effect determining table for 16R.

The opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 5R shown in FIG. 62 is a table referred to by the MPU 51 when determining the opening / closing execution mode effect at the time of a 5R jackpot. That is, when the jackpot type is a 5R jackpot, the MPU 51 determines the 5R open / close execution mode effect using the same 5R open / close execution mode effect determination table for the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variation jackpot. Of course, it is also possible to prepare different 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination tables for the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variation jackpot, and determine the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect based on them.

The opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 5R includes an effect scenario table corresponding to the selected character, and five effect scenario tables of 1R selection effect scenario table to 5R selection effect scenario table are set for each selected character. Has been done. For example, the 1R selection effect scenario table for 5R character 1 is an effect scenario table selected when the specific character effect for the selected character is executed in 1R, and the 5R selection effect scenario table for 5R character 1 is 5R for the specific character effect. This is the production scenario table selected in. For example, in the MPU 51, when the round game for executing the specific character effect is one round, the jackpot type is a 5R probability variation jackpot, and the selected character is character 1, the open / close execution mode effect for 5R is produced as an open / close execution mode effect scenario. The "1R selection effect scenario table for 5R character 1" in the determination table is determined.

Note that FIG. 62 shows only the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for the character 1, but similarly for the characters 2 to 9, five different round games for executing the specific character effect for the selected character are shown. The production scenario table is set. That is, in the present embodiment, since any one of the characters 1 to 9 can be selected as the selected character, the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 5R has a total of 5 characters corresponding to each of the characters 1 to 9. Includes 45 production scenario tables.

The 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table shown in FIG. 63 is a table referred to by the MPU 51 when determining the opening / closing execution mode effect at the time of 16R jackpot. The opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 16R includes an effect scenario table corresponding to the selected character, and 16 effect scenario tables of 1R selection effect scenario table to 16R selection effect scenario table are set for each selected character. ing. Note that FIG. 63 shows only the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for the character 1, but similarly for the characters 2 to 9, 16 different round games for executing the specific character effect for the selected character are shown. The production scenario table is set. That is, in the present embodiment, since any one of the characters 1 to 9 can be selected as the selected character, the 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table has a total of 16 characters corresponding to each of the characters 1 to 9. Includes 171 production scenario tables.

In both the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 5R and the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 16R, each effect scenario table includes an effect scenario type, a round game effect character type, and a scenario type counter. The effect scenario type, the round game effect character type, and the scenario type counter are the same as those of the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table of the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 34, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. To do.

On the other hand, in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 5R and the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 16R, the specific character effect for the selected character is always executed once in any of the round games of the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the player can always enjoy the specific character effect for the selected character in one big hit game.

Returning to the description of FIG. 61, when the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table is determined (step S4104), the MPU 51 determines the effect scenario in the opening / closing execution mode based on the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table determined in step S4104 (step S4104). Step S4105).

In the present embodiment, after the round game for executing the visual impairment effect is determined, the round game for executing the specific character effect for the selected character is determined while avoiding the round game for which the visual impairment effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specific character effect from being hindered by the visual hindrance effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the specific character effect is executed once in any round of the round game. Therefore, the player can always enjoy the specific character effect for the selected character in the open / close execution mode.

In the present embodiment, the specific character effect is always executed once in any of the round games in the open / close execution mode, but when the game situation is advantageous for the player, for example, when the reserved consecutive villa is confirmed. In the jackpot game, which is an advantageous game situation for such a player, when the next jackpot is scheduled to be executed relatively, such as in the case of a probability variation jackpot, a specific character effect is executed. You may not do it. As a result, the player can enjoy the jackpot game by paying attention to whether or not the specific character effect is executed in the round game in the open / close execution mode. If the specific character effect is not executed in the jackpot game because the game situation is advantageous for the player, the specific character effect may be performed a plurality of times in the next jackpot game. For example, a specific character effect may be executed in all round games in the open / close execution mode, or a specific character effect may be performed in at least one of the opening and ending in addition to all the round games in the open / close execution mode. You may want to do it. As a result, the player can enjoy the specific character production in the current jackpot game up to the amount of the previous jackpot game when the specific character production is not executed in the previous jackpot. In addition, regarding the execution of a specific character effect in all round games in the open / close execution mode, it is a condition that the game situation is advantageous for the player, as in the case of a probabilistic jackpot and the case where the reserved consecutive villa is confirmed. May be good.

[Outline of Invention]
The outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below. In addition, in order to understand the correspondence between each appendix and each embodiment, the description may be given with reference numerals for convenience, but the invention according to the appendix is limited to the specific configuration with the reference numerals. It's not a thing. Further, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, the determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to the special game state (big hit game state) in which the special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed, and
A main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game based on the determination result of the determination means (41), and
The special game and the special game, including an image display means (341) for displaying a specific selection subject image (selected character image 714) for a specific selection subject (selected character) selected by a player from a plurality of selection subjects (characters). In the notification game (variable game) that notifies the determination result, the effect means (341, etc.) in which the game effect (big hit game effect, variable game effect) is executed, and
An effect executing means (51) for causing the effect means (341, etc.) to execute the game effect, and
With
The game effect is the specific selection subject image effect (specific character effect) executed by the image display means (341) with the specific selection subject as the main body, and the image display as the game effect executed in the special game. Including a visual impairment effect that hinders the visual recognition of the effect performed in the means (341).
The effect executing means (51) is a gaming machine comprising means for setting the specific selection subject image effect to be executed at a timing different from that of the visual impairment effect in the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, in the special game, the specific selection subject image production for the specific production subject selected by the player is executed at a timing different from the visual inhibition effect. Therefore, the player can fully enjoy the specific selection-based image production in the special game without hindering the visual recognition of the specific selection-based image production.

[Appendix A2]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games (round games) that give a player a game value (game ball).
The effect executing means (51) is
At the first timing set in the first period in which a predetermined specific unit game among the plurality of unit games is executed, the specific selection subject image effect is executed.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A1, wherein the visual impairment effect is executed at a second timing set in a second period other than the first period in the special game.

[Appendix A3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A2, wherein the first period is a period in which the first unit game (one round) to be executed first among the plurality of unit games is executed.

[Appendix A4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A3, wherein the second period is a period in which a unit game other than the first unit game among the plurality of unit games is executed.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices A2 to A4, the specific selection subject image effect is executed in the specific unit game such as the first unit game. Therefore, since the player can grasp in advance the unit game in which the specific selection-based image production is executed, he / she may miss the specific selection-based image production such as the selected character image production by paying attention to the variable winning opening, for example. Can be prevented.

[Appendix A5]
When the effect executing means (51) determines a first timing for executing the specific selection main image effect and a second timing for executing the visual impairment effect, at least the first timing and the second timing are determined. Described in Appendix A1, wherein when a part of the timing overlaps, one of the first timing and the second timing is redetermined to a timing at which the first timing and the second timing do not overlap. Game machine.

[Appendix A6]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games (round games) that give a player a game value (game ball).
The game according to Appendix A5, wherein the effect determining means (51) determines the first timing and the second timing during a period in which any of the plurality of unit games is executed. Machine.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices A5 and A6, when at least a part of the first timing for executing the specific selection main image effect and the second timing for executing the visual impairment effect overlap, the first timing and the second timing One of the timings is redetermined to a timing at which the first timing and the second timing do not overlap. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specific selection-based image effect from being hindered by the visual hindrance effect in advance. Further, by determining the first timing for executing the specific selection-based image effect and redetermining the first timing as necessary, the specific-selection-based image effect is not executed by being fixed to the specific unit game. , The execution timing of the specific selection main image effect is randomly determined. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the image display means in order to confirm the specific selection subject image production, so that the production for the selection subject other than the specific selection subject can be positively appreciated, and the production other than the specific selection subject can be positively appreciated. You will be given the opportunity to confirm the goodness of the selection subject.

[Appendix A7]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games (round games) that give a player a game value (game ball).
Further provided with a duplication determination means (51) for determining whether or not the specific selection subject image effect is executed during the execution of the visual impairment effect before the visual inhibition effect is executed.
When it is determined by the duplication determination means (51) that the specific selection main image production is executed during the execution of the visual inhibition effect, the effect execution means (51) is after the end of the specific selection main image production. The gaming machine according to Appendix A1, wherein the visual impairment effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix A7, it is determined whether the specific selection main image production is executed during the execution of the visual inhibition effect before the visual inhibition effect is executed, and the specific selection main image is executed during the execution of the visual inhibition effect. When it is determined that the effect is to be executed, the visual impairment effect is executed after the specific selection main image effect is completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specific selection-based image effect from being hindered by the visual hindrance effect in advance.

[Appendix A8]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games that give a player a game value.
The effect executing means is
The specific selection subject image effect is executed during the unit game period in which any of the plurality of unit games is executed.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A1, wherein the visual inhibition effect is executed during an interval period between the unit games.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix A8, the specific selection main image effect is executed during the unit game period, while the visual impairment effect is executed during the interval period between the unit games. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution timing of the specific selection main image effect from overlapping with the execution timing of the visual impairment effect, and it is possible to prevent the specific selection main image effect from being obstructed by the visual impairment effect.

[Appendix A9]
The specific selection-based image effect is executed by the image display means (341) based on a multilayer layer image in which a plurality of images are superimposed.
The visual impairment effect is an image in which an information notification image (831,851,861,871 or the like) for notifying predetermined information is displayed on the image display means (341) in a visible layer in the multilayer image. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A8, which is characterized by being a production.

[Appendix A10]
The information notification image is an image (861) that notifies that the integrated value of the game value given to the player exceeds the predetermined game value during the execution period of one or more of the special games that satisfy the predetermined conditions. ). The gaming machine according to Appendix A9.

[Appendix A11]
The notified game state is the first notified game state (low probability mode) and the second notification in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the determination means (41) is higher than that of the first notified game state. Including the game state (high probability mode),
The special gaming state shifts to the first special gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state) that shifts to the first notification gaming state after the end of the special game, and to the second notification gaming state after the end of the special game. Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state, 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state)
The gaming machine according to Appendix A9, wherein the information notification image is an image (831) suggesting or clearly indicating that the special gaming state is the second special gaming state.

[Appendix A12]
A holding means (41) that holds the right to proceed with the notification game by the main control means (41) up to a predetermined upper limit, and
A hold result storage means (412) for storing the determination result for the hold notification game held by the hold means (41), and a hold result storage means (412).
With more
The information notification image includes a determination result for the hold notification game stored in the hold notification storage means (412) that shifts to the special game state after the execution of the hold notification game. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A9 to Appendix A11, which is an image (851) suggesting or clearly indicating that.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices A9 to A12, it is possible to prevent the specific selection main image effect from being disturbed by various information broadcasting images that are the visual impairment effect.

[Appendix A13]
The effect means (341, etc.) further includes a movable member (39) that can move between a standby position having a low covering ratio covering the display screen in the image display means (341) and an operating position having a high covering ratio. Prepare,
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A12, wherein the visual impairment effect is a movable member operating effect in which the movable member (39) is moved from the standby position to the operating position.

[Appendix A14]
The notified game state is the first notified game state (low probability mode) and the second notification in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the determination means (41) is higher than that of the first notified game state. Including the game state (high probability mode),
The special gaming state shifts to the first special gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state) that shifts to the first notification gaming state after the end of the special game, and to the second notification gaming state after the end of the special game. Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state, 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state)
The gaming machine according to Appendix A13, wherein the movable member operating effect is an effect that suggests or clearly indicates that the special gaming state is the second special gaming state.

[Appendix A15]
A holding means (41) that holds the right to proceed with the notification game by the main control means (41) up to a predetermined upper limit, and
A hold result storage means (412) for storing the determination result for the hold notification game held by the hold means (41), and a hold result storage means (412).
With more
The movable member operation effect includes a determination result for the hold notification game stored in the hold result storage means (412), which shifts to the special game state after the execution of the hold notification game. The gaming machine according to Appendix A13 or Appendix A14, which is an effect suggesting or clearly indicating that the player is present.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices A9 to A15, it is possible to prevent the specific selection-based image production from being hindered by various effects such as the movable member operation effect, the promotion effect, and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect, which are the visual inhibition effects. it can.

[Appendix B1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, the determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to the special game state (big hit game state) in which the special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed, and
A main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game based on the determination result of the determination means (41), and
A specific selection subject image (selected character image 714) for a specific selection subject (selected character) selected by a player from a plurality of selection subjects (characters), and a priority display image (871,) displayed with priority over the selection subject. An effect means for executing a game effect (big hit game effect, variable game effect) in the special game and the notification game (variable game) for notifying the determination result, including the image display means (341) on which 872) is displayed. (341, etc.) and
An effect executing means (51) for causing the effect means (341, etc.) to execute the game effect, and
With
The game effect includes, as the game effect executed in the special game, a specific select subject image effect (specific character effect) executed by the image display means (341) mainly with the specific select subject.
The execution timing of the specific selection main image effect by the image display means (341) from the start of the display of the priority display image by the image display means (341) to the end of the display of the priority display image. A gaming machine further comprising an effect determining means (51) for determining whether or not the image is.

[Appendix B2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B1, wherein the priority display image is an abnormality notification image (871,872) indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine.

[Appendix B3]
The effect determining means (51) is the image display means (341) when the specific selection main body image effect is executed in the image display means (341) at the time when the display of the priority display image is started. The gaming machine according to Appendix B1 or Appendix B2, wherein it is determined that it is the execution timing of the specific selection subject image effect.

[Appendix B4]
The effect determination means (51) displays the image when the execution start timing of the specific selection main image effect arrives between the start of the display of the priority display image and the end of the display of the priority display image. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B3, wherein it is determined that it is the execution timing of the specific selection subject image effect by the means (341).

[Appendix B5]
When the effect determining means (51) determines that the effect timing is the execution timing of the specific selection subject image effect, the effect executing means (51) displays the priority display image on the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B4, characterized in that the specific selection-based image effect is executed after the completion.

[Appendix B6]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games (round games) that give a player a game value (game ball).
When the effect determining means (51) determines that the effect timing is the execution timing of the specific selection subject image effect, the effect executing means (51) displays the priority display image on the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to Appendix B5, characterized in that the specific selection subject image effect is executed in the undigested unit game among the plurality of unit games that is started after the end time.

[Appendix B7]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games (round games) that give a player a game value (game ball), and an ending that shifts after the end of the plurality of unit games.
The effect executing means (51) is characterized in that when it is determined by the effect determining means (51) that it is the execution timing of the specific selection subject image effect, the effect execution means (51) executes the specific selection subject image effect at the ending. The gaming machine according to Appendix B5.

[Appendix B8]
When there is no undigested unit game among the plurality of unit games started after the time when the display of the priority display image on the image display means (341) is completed, the effect executing means (51) The gaming machine according to Appendix B7, wherein the specific selection-based image effect is executed in the ending.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices B1 to B8, the specific selection main image effect is performed from the start of displaying the priority display image such as the abnormality notification image to the end of the display of the priority display image in the image display means. It is determined whether or not it is executed by the image display means. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the visual recognition of the specific selection main image effect is hindered by the priority display image. As a result, when the priority display image obstructs the visibility of the specific selection main image effect, it becomes possible to compensate for it. For example, when the display of the priority display image is canceled by eliminating the abnormality when the visibility of the specific selection main image effect is obstructed by the priority display image, the obstructed specific selection main image effect is used as the priority display image. After the display is released, it becomes possible to take measures such as executing an undigested unit game or ending. As a result, even when the priority display image obstructs the visual recognition of the specific selection main image production, the player can fully enjoy the specific selection main image production in the special game.

[Appendix B9]
The specific selection subject image effect is a normal specific selection subject image effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect execution means (51) and a special specific selection subject image effect having a low probability of being executed by the effect execution means (51). And, including
When the effect determining means (51) determines that the specific selection subject image effect is being executed, the effect executing means (51) displays the priority display image on the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary note B5 to Supplementary note B8, characterized in that the special specific selection subject image effect is executed after the completion.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix B9, when the specific selection subject image effect is executed during the display of the priority display image, the special specific selection subject having a low execution probability is executed as the specific selection subject image production after the display of the priority display image is canceled. Image production is executed. That is, as compensation for hindering the visibility of the specific selection subject image production, a rare production or a premier production for the specific selection subject is executed. Therefore, even when the visibility of the specific selection-based image production is hindered, the emotions such as irritation and dissatisfaction of the player at that time can be reduced by executing the special selection-based image production.

[Appendix B10]
When the effect determining means (51) determines that the specific selection subject image effect is being executed, the effect executing means (51) displays the priority display image on the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B5 to B9, wherein it is determined by lottery whether or not to execute the specific selection subject image production after the completion.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix B10, the specific selection main image production is executed by winning the lottery when the visibility of the specific selection main image production is hindered. That is, even if the visibility of the specific selection main image effect is hindered, the specific selection main image effect may or may not be executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise by executing the specific selection-based image effect after the display of the priority display image is completed, and to improve the interest of the special game.

[Appendix B11]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B1, wherein the effect executing means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display the priority display image so that the specific selection subject image effect can be visually recognized.

[Appendix B12]
The effect executing means (51) is
The priority display image is displayed on the entire display screen of the image display means (341) or substantially the entire display screen.
The appendix B11 is characterized in that the selection specific selection main image effect is reduced from the display size before displaying the priority display image and executed in a predetermined part of the priority display image. The game machine described.

[Appendix B13]
The effect executing means (51) is characterized in that the priority display image is superimposed on the display screen on a part of the display screen of the specific selection main image effect in the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to Appendix B11.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices B11 to B13, the priority display image is displayed on the image display means so that the specific selection main image effect can be visually recognized. For example, the specific selection main image effect is executed in a predetermined part of the priority display image by reducing the display size before displaying the priority display image, or the specific selection main image by the image display means. By superimposing the priority display image on the display screen on a part of the display screen of the effect, the priority display image can be visually recognized even when it is displayed on the image display means. As a result, the player can enjoy the specific selection-based image production in the special game even when the priority display image is displayed on the image display means.

[Appendix B14]
Execution of the specific selection subject image production for executing the specific selection subject image production in the next special game on condition that the effect determination means (51) determines that the specific selection subject image production is being executed. Further equipped with a storage means (512) for storing information (specific character production stock flag),
The gaming machine according to Appendix B1, wherein the effect executing means (51) executes the specific selection subject image effect when the specific selection subject image effect execution information is stored in the storage means. ..

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix B14, as compensation when the visibility of the specific selection main image effect is hindered by displaying the priority display image in the image display means, the amount of the hindrance in the next special game. The specific selection subject image production of is executed. As a result, even when the priority display image obstructs the visibility of the specific selection main image production, the player can fully enjoy the specific selection main image production in the next special game.

[Appendix B15]
The notified game state is the first notified game state (low probability mode) and the second notification in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the determination means (41) is higher than that of the first notified game state. Including the game state (high probability mode),
The special gaming state shifts to the first special gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state) that shifts to the first notification gaming state after the end of the special game, and to the second notification gaming state after the end of the special game. Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state, 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state)
The gaming machine according to Appendix B14, wherein the storage means stores the specific selection subject image production execution information on condition that the second special game is executed.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix B15, if the priority display image obstructs the visibility of the specific selection main image effect on condition that the second special game is being executed, the visibility is hindered in the next special game. The specific selection-based image production is executed. That is, when it is assumed that the time for the next special game to be executed is relatively short, the specific selection-based image effect for which the visual recognition is hindered in the next special game is executed. As a result, as a privilege of being the second special game, the specific selection-based image production for the amount of the hindered visual recognition is executed, and the player can enjoy the privilege. Further, on condition that the second special game is being executed, the compensation when the priority display image is displayed in the image display means and the visibility of the specific selection main image effect is hindered is the compensation. Can be prevented from being done earlier than it is hard to say.

[Appendix B16]
The effect executing means (51) executes the specific select subject image effect based on the specific select subject image effect execution information stored in the storage means, thereby performing the specific select subject image effect in the special game. When executed twice or more, the specific selection main image effect executed based on the specific selection main image effect execution information is executed as an effect different from the other specific selection main image effect. The gaming machine according to B14 or Appendix B15.

[Appendix B17]
The special game includes an opening and a plurality of unit games (round games) that shift after the opening and give a game value (game ball) to the player.
The effect executing means (51) executes the specific select subject image effect based on the specific select subject image effect execution information stored in the storage means, thereby performing the specific select subject image effect in the special game. The gaming machine according to Appendix B16, characterized in that the specific selection subject image production executed based on the specific selection subject image production execution information is executed at the opening when the execution is performed twice or more.

According to the gaming machines according to Appendix B16 and Appendix B17, when the priority display image obstructs the visibility of the specific selection subject image production, and the specific selection subject image production is executed twice or more in the next special game, The specific selection main image effect executed as the compensation is executed as an effect different from other specific selection main image effects. Therefore, by executing the same specific selection main image production twice or more, it is possible to suppress the feeling of getting tired of the specific selection main image production. In particular, by executing the specific selection subject image production executed as compensation at the opening, the specific selection subject image production is compared with the case where the same specific selection subject image production is executed twice or more in a plurality of unit games. It is possible to effectively suppress the feeling of getting tired of seeing. In addition, the player can enjoy the benefit that the compensation for hindering the visibility of the specific selection-based image effect by the priority display image is executed as an effect different from other specific-selection-based image effects. , You can enjoy special games more.

[Appendix B18]
The specific selection subject image effect is a normal specific selection subject image effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect execution means (51) and a special specific selection subject image effect having a low probability of being executed by the effect execution means (51). And, including
The effect execution means (51) is added from Appendix B14, characterized in that the special specific select subject image effect is executed as the specific select subject image effect executed based on the specific select subject image effect execution information. The gaming machine according to any one of B17.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix B18, when the specific selection main image production is executed during the display of the priority display image, the special specific selection main image production having a low execution probability is performed as the specific selection main image production in the next special game. Will be executed. That is, as compensation for hindering the visibility of the specific selection subject image production, a rare production or a premier production for the specific selection subject is executed in the next special game. Therefore, even when the visibility of the specific selection-based image production is hindered, the emotions such as irritation and dissatisfaction of the player at that time can be reduced by executing the special selection-based image production.

[Appendix C1]
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition, and
A main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game based on the determination result of the determination means (41), and
An image display means (341) in which a notification game image production (variable game production) is executed in a notification game that notifies the determination result, and a special game image production (big hit game production) is executed in the special game.
An effect executing means (51) for causing the image display means (341) to execute the notification game image effect and the special game image effect.
With
The special game includes an opening and a plurality of unit games (round games) that shift after the opening and give a game value (game ball) to the player.
The notification game image production is a production character such as a notification game specific production main body image production (super reach production, special reach production, etc.) in which a specific production subject (effect character) among a plurality of production subjects (characters) is mainly displayed. (Direction) included
The special game image production includes a special game specific production subject image production (effect character production) in which the specific production subject is mainly displayed.
In the effect executing means (51), when the state is shifted to the special game state, the triggered game image effect executed at a predetermined timing of the notified game that triggered the transition to the special game state is notified. In the case of the game-specific effect-based image effect, the special game-specific effect-based image effect is executed in at least one of the opening and the first unit game to be executed first in the plurality of unit games. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, the special game specific effect subject image effect for the specific effect subject in the trigger game image effect in the variable game is executed in the special game. Therefore, in the special game, the player can fully enjoy the specific production subject of the special game specific production subject image production in the notification game. In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the special game specific effect-based image effect is executed at the opening of the special game or the first unit game. Therefore, the special game specific effect-based image production is executed in the special game in a relatively short time after the end of the notification game, in other words, in a relatively short time after the end of the trigger game image production in the notification game. Therefore, the player can perform the trigger game image production of the notification game in a state where the lingering sound of the notification game specific production main image production such as the reach production in the notification game that triggered the transition to the special game remains. You can also enjoy a specific production subject in a special game. As a result, the specific production subject can be further enjoyed in the special game.

[Appendix C2]
The effect executing means (51) is determined in at least one of the opening and the first unit game according to the type of the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect, and the special game specific effect subject image. The gaming machine according to Appendix C1, which is characterized by performing an effect.

[Appendix C3]
The plurality of directing actors include a first directing subject belonging to the first directing subject group and a second directing subject belonging to a second directing subject group different from the first directing subject group.
The notification game specific effect subject image production is the first notification game specific effect subject image effect when the specific effect subject is the first effect subject, and the above-mentioned case where the specific effect subject is the second effect subject. Including the second notification game specific production main image production
The effect executing means (51) is
When the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect is the first effect subject, the special game specific effect subject image effect is executed at the opening.
The game according to Appendix C2, characterized in that the special game specific effect subject image effect is executed in the first unit game when the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect is the second effect subject. Machine.

[Appendix C4]
In the effect executing means (51), when there are a plurality of the specific effect subjects in the trigger game image effect, a part or all of the specific effect subjects are proactively displayed in the special game. The gaming machine according to Appendix C2 or Appendix C3, wherein the specific effect-based image effect is executed in the opening effect.

[Appendix C5]
In the effect determining means (51), the notification game specific effect subject image effect in the trigger game image effect is displayed as the specific effect subject, which is more than half of the plurality of effect subjects. The gaming machine according to Appendix C4, characterized in that, in a certain case, the special game specific effect subject image effect in which more than half of the effect subjects are displayed is executed in the opening effect.

[Appendix C6]
The effect executing means (51) executes the special game specific effect main image effect in at least one of the opening and the first unit game, which is determined according to the type of the opportunity game image effect. The gaming machine according to Appendix C1 as a feature.

[Appendix C7]
The notification game specific production main image production includes a first notification game specific production main image production belonging to the first production group and a second notification game specific production main image production belonging to a second production group different from the first production group. Including and
The effect executing means (51) is
When the trigger game image production is the first notification game specific production main image production, the special game specific production main image production is executed at the opening.
The gaming machine according to Appendix C6, wherein when the trigger game image production is the second notification game specific production main image production, the special game specific production main image production is executed in the first unit game. ..

[Appendix C8]
The description in Appendix C7, wherein the first notification game specific effect main image production is an effect executed when the game time in the notification game is longer than that of the second notification game specific effect main image production. Game machine.

[Appendix C9]
In the first notification game specific effect main image production, the degree of expectation that the determination result by the determination means (41) shifts to the special game state is higher than that of the second notification game specific effect main image production. The gaming machine described in Appendix C7, which is characterized by a high level of production.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices C2 to C9, the special game specific production subject image production is performed in the opening or the first unit game according to the type of the trigger game image production and the type of the specific production subject in the trigger game image production. Will be executed. As described above, in the game machine, the special game specific production subject image production regarding the production subject grouped according to the type of the trigger game image production and the type of the specific production subject in the trigger game image production is executed. As a result, the special game can be enjoyed in a fashion that reflects the trigger game image production in the notification game that triggered the transition to the special game. In particular, the special game specific production-based image production in which multiple production subjects appear as specific production subjects, such as Allcast Reach, is executed at the opening to reflect the opportunity game image production and enjoy the afterglow. Can be done.

[Appendix C10]
The special game includes a first special game (5R normal jackpot game) and a second special game (16R probability variation jackpot game) having different advantages for the player.
The effect executing means (51) determines to execute the special game specific effect main image effect in at least one of the opening and the first unit game determined according to the type of the special game. The gaming machine according to Appendix C1, characterized by the above.

[Appendix C11]
The notified game state is the first notified game state (low probability mode) and the second notification in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the determination means (41) is higher than that of the first notified game state. Including the game state (high probability mode),
The first special game is shifted to the first notified game state after the end of the first special game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix C10, wherein the second special game is shifted to the second notification game state after the end of the second special game.

[Appendix C12]
The effect executing means (51) is
In the case of the first special game, the special game specific effect main image effect is executed in the first unit game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix C11, characterized in that, in the case of the second special game, the special game specific effect main image effect is executed at the opening.

[Appendix C13]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C10, wherein the first special game and the second special game have different numbers of the plurality of unit games.

[Appendix C14]
The second special game executes a larger number of the unit games than the first special game.
The effect executing means (51) is
In the case of the first special game, the special game specific effect main image effect is executed at the opening.
The gaming machine according to Appendix C10, characterized in that, in the case of the second special game, the special game specific effect subject image effect is executed in the first unit game.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices C10 to C14, the special game specific effect main image effect is executed in the opening or the first unit game according to the jackpot type. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the special game in a fashion that reflects the determination result of the variable game (the game state of the special game) that triggered the transition to the special game. For example, in the case of the second special game state which is more advantageous for the player, the special game specific effect main image effect is executed at the opening. As a result, the player can produce an opportunity game image in the special game while leaving a lingering sound at the opening executed before the unit game in the case of the advantageous second special game, that is, immediately after the end of the special game. You can enjoy the specific production subject in.

[Appendix C15]
The effect executing means (51) is characterized in that, in the unit game to be executed after the end of the first unit game among the plurality of unit games, an effect other than the special game specific effect main image effect is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C1 to C14.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix C15, it is possible to prevent the special game specific effect-based image effect from being repeatedly executed. As a result, the player can enjoy the special game specific effect-based image effect only in the opening or the first unit game in which the lingering sound of the notified game effect remains large.

[Appendix C16]
The effect executing means (51) is the special game in any of the unit games to be executed after the end of the first unit game among the plurality of unit games when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C1 to C15, which is characterized by executing a specific effect-based image production.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix C16, the special game is specified in the unit game to be executed after the end of the first unit game when a predetermined condition, for example, the specific effect subject is the same as the selected subject selected by the player. Production-based image production is executed. Therefore, the player executes the special game specific production main image production other than the opening and the first unit game, so that the player can confirm the special game specific production main image production for the specific production main in the notification game production. It becomes possible to draw attention to the display means. As a result, it is possible to positively appreciate the production for the production subject other than the specific production subject, and an opportunity to confirm the goodness of the production subject other than the specific production subject is given.

[Appendix D1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, the determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to the special game state (big hit game state) in which the special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed, and
A main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game based on the determination result of the determination means (41), and
An image display means (341) in which a notification game image production (variable game production) is executed in a notification game that notifies the determination result, and a special game image production (big hit game production) is executed in the special game.
An effect executing means for causing the image display means (341) to execute the notification game image effect and the special game image effect.
With
The notification game image production is a specific production subject image production in which a specific production subject (effect character) among a plurality of production subjects (characters) is mainly displayed (production character production such as super reach production and special reach production). Including
The special game image production is performed by the image display means (341) with the specific selection subject (selected character) selected by the player from a plurality of selection subjects (characters) as the main body (specific character). (Direction) included
In the effect executing means, when the state is shifted to the special game state, the trigger game image effect executed at a predetermined timing of the notified game that triggered the transition to the special game state is the specific effect main image. In the case of the effect, the gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect subject image effect is executed on the condition that the specific effect subject in the specific effect subject image effect is the same as the specific select subject.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix D1, when the specific production subject in the trigger game image production executed at a predetermined timing is the same as the specific selection subject, the specific production subject (that is, the specific selection subject) in the special game. The specific selection subject image effect for is executed. Therefore, the player can fully enjoy the specific production subject (specific selection subject) that the player is attached to in the special game.

[Appendix D2]
The special game includes an opening and a plurality of unit games that shift after the opening and give the player a game value.
When the specific effect subject in the trigger game image effect is the same as the specific select subject, the effect executing means (51) has the opening and a predetermined specific unit game among the plurality of unit games. The gaming machine according to Appendix D1, wherein the specific selection subject image effect is executed in at least one of the above.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix D2, the specific selection subject image production of the special game is executed at least one of the opening and the specific unit game. Therefore, the player can enjoy the specific production subject (specific selection subject) in the game image production, which is the trigger of the variable game that triggered the transition to the special game, even in the special game.

[Appendix D3]
When the specific effect subject in the trigger game image effect is the same as the specific select subject, the effect determining means (51) performs the specific select subject image effect in both the opening and the specific unit game. The gaming machine according to Appendix D2, characterized in that it is executed.

[Appendix D4]
The specific selection main image production includes a first specific selection main image production and a second specific production main image production different from the first specific selection main image production.
When the specific effect subject in the trigger game image effect is the same as the specific select subject, the effect execution means (51) executes the first select subject image effect at the opening and performs the specific unit game. The gaming machine according to Appendix D3, wherein the second selection subject image effect is executed.

According to the gaming machines according to Appendix D3 and Appendix D4, as a privilege that the specific effect subject is the same as the specific select subject, the specific select subject image effect of the special game is executed in both the opening and the specific unit game. .. Therefore, in both the opening and the specific unit game, the player sets the specific production subject (specific selection subject) in the game image production as the trigger of the variable game that triggered the transition to the special game as a different production. You can enjoy it times.

[Appendix D5]
The notified game state is a first notified game state (low probability mode) and a second notified game state in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the determination means is higher than that of the first notified game state (low probability mode). High probability mode), including
The special gaming state shifts to the first special gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state) that shifts to the first notification gaming state after the end of the special game, and to the second notification gaming state after the end of the special game. Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state, 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state)
When the specific effect subject in the trigger game image effect is the same as the specific effect subject, the effect determination means (51) is subject to the condition that the special game state is the second special game state. The gaming machine according to Appendix D4, wherein the first specific selection subject image production is executed at the opening, and the second specific selection subject image production is executed in the specific unit game.

[Appendix D6]
A holding means for holding the right to proceed with the notification game by the main control means up to a predetermined upper limit, and a holding means.
A hold result storage means for storing the determination result for the hold notification game held by the hold means, and a hold result storage means.
With more
When the specific effect subject in the trigger game image effect is the same as the specific select subject, the effect executing means (51) is among the determination results for the hold notification game stored in the hold result storage means. The first specific selection subject image effect is executed at the opening, and the first specific unit game is performed on the condition that a device that shifts to the special game state after the execution of the hold notification game is included in the above. 2 The gaming machine according to Appendix D4, which is characterized by performing a specific selection-based image production.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices D5 and D6, the opening and the specific unit game are performed on the condition that the specific production subject and the specific selection subject are the same and in a state advantageous to the player. A specific selection-based image effect is executed on both sides. That is, on the condition that it is the second special game or the reserved consecutive villa is confirmed, the specific selection subject image production is executed in both the opening and the specific unit game, so that the opening and the specific unit When the specific selection-based image production is executed in both of the games, it is possible to know that the state is advantageous to the player. Therefore, in the special game, the player can enjoy the special game by paying attention to whether the specific selection-based image production is executed in the specific unit game in addition to the opening.

[Appendix D7]
When the specific effect subject in the trigger game image effect is the same as the specific select subject, the effect executing means may be used in a non-specific unit game other than the specific unit game among the plurality of unit games. The gaming machine according to Appendix D2, wherein an effect other than the specific selection-based image effect is executed.

[Appendix D8]
The notified game state is a first notified game state (low probability mode) and a second notified game state in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the determination means is higher than that of the first notified game state (low probability mode). High probability mode), including
The special gaming state shifts to the first special gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state) that shifts to the first notification gaming state after the end of the special game, and to the second notification gaming state after the end of the special game. Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state, 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state)
When the specific effect subject in the trigger game image effect is the same as the specific select subject, the effect executing means (51) is subject to the condition that the special game state is the second special game state. The gaming machine according to Appendix D7, characterized in that the specific selection subject image effect is executed in a non-specific unit game.

[Appendix D9]
A holding means for holding the right to proceed with the notification game by the main control means up to a predetermined upper limit, and a holding means.
A hold result storage means for storing the determination result for the hold notification game held by the hold means, and a hold result storage means.
With more
When the specific effect subject in the trigger game image effect is the same as the specific select subject, the effect executing means (51) is among the determination results for the hold notification game stored in the hold result storage means. The appendix is characterized in that the specific selection subject image effect is executed in the non-specific unit game, provided that the one that shifts to the special game state after the execution of the hold notification game is included in the above. The gaming machine described in D7.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices D7 to D9, the execution of the specific selection subject image production for the specific production subject (that is, the specific selection subject) other than the opening and the specific round is restricted. Therefore, the player can enjoy the specific selection-based image production as a specialized production that can be executed in the opening and the specific unit game. On the other hand, in a non-specific unit game, provided that the special game state is the second special game state (for example, a probabilistic game state), or that it is confirmed that the reserved consecutive villa will be executed after the special game ends. , The specific selection subject image production is executed. That is, only when the state is advantageous to the player, the specific selection subject image effect is executed in the non-specific unit game. Therefore, in order to confirm whether or not the state is advantageous to the player, the player pays attention to whether or not the specific selection subject image effect is executed in the non-specific unit game. As a result, the player can enjoy the special game by paying attention to the production in the non-specific unit game and confirming whether the state is advantageous to himself / herself.

[Appendix D10]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D2 to D9, wherein the specific unit game is the first unit game to be executed first in the plurality of unit games.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix D10, after the end of the variable game, the specific selection-based image effect is executed in a series of flow from the opening to the first unit game (first unit game) in the special game. Therefore, the player has a series of opening and first unit games from the end of the trigger game image production in a state where the lingering sound of the trigger game image production in the variable game that triggered the transition to the special game remains. In the flow, you can enjoy a specific production subject (specific selection subject) even in a special game.

[Appendix D11]
The specific selection subject image production includes a normal specific production subject image production executed by the effect execution means (51) when the specific production subject in the trigger game image production is different from the specific selection subject, and the trigger game. The game according to Appendix D1, which includes a special specific effect subject image effect executed by the effect execution means (51) when the specific effect subject in the image effect is the same as the specific select subject. Machine.

[Appendix D12]
The notified game state is a first notified game state (low probability mode) and a second notified game state in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the determination means is higher than that of the first notified game state (low probability mode). High probability mode), including
The special gaming state shifts to the first special gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state) that shifts to the first notification gaming state after the end of the special game, and to the second notification gaming state after the end of the special game. Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state, 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state)
When the specific effect subject in the trigger game image effect is the same as the specific select subject, the effect executing means (51) is subject to the condition that the special game state is the second special game state. The gaming machine according to Appendix D11, wherein the specific selection subject image production is executed as the specific selection subject image production.

[Appendix D13]
A holding means for holding the right to proceed with the notification game by the main control means up to a predetermined upper limit, and a holding means.
A hold result storage means for storing the determination result for the hold notification game held by the hold means, and a hold result storage means.
With more
When the specific effect subject in the trigger game image effect is the same as the specific select subject, the effect determination means includes the determination result for the hold notification game stored in the hold result storage means. The description in Appendix D11, characterized in that the specific selection subject image effect is executed as the specific selection subject image production on condition that a device that shifts to the special game state is included after the execution of the hold notification game. Game machine.

[Appendix D14]
The special game includes an opening and a plurality of unit games that shift after the opening and give the player a game value.
When the specific effect subject in the trigger game image effect is the same as the specific select subject, the effect execution means (51) is the first unit game to be executed first in the opening and the plurality of unit games. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D11 to D13, characterized in that the specific selection subject image production is executed as the specific selection subject image production in at least one of the above.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices D11 to D14, the special specific selection subject image effect is executed on the condition that the specific effect subject and the specific selection subject are the same. That is, the player can enjoy the special specific selection subject image production as a privilege that the specific production subject and the specific selection subject are the same.

[Appendix E1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, the determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to the special game state (big hit game state) in which the special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed, and
A main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game based on the determination result of the determination means (41), and
The special game and the special game, including an image display means (341) for displaying a specific selection subject image (selected character image 714) for a specific selection subject (selected character) selected by a player from a plurality of selection subjects (characters). In the notification game (variable game) that notifies the determination result, the effect means (341, etc.) in which the game effect (big hit game effect, variable game effect) is executed, and
An effect executing means (51) for causing the effect means (341, etc.) to execute the game effect, and
With
The game effect is a specific selection subject image effect (specific character effect) executed by the image display means (341) with the selection subject as the main body and the image display means as the game effect executed in the special game. Including the visual impairment effect that hinders the visual recognition of the effect executed in (341).
The effect executing means (51) is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific selection main image effect is executed before the execution of the visual inhibition effect, and the specific selection main image effect is not executed after the execution of the visual inhibition effect. ..

[Appendix E2]
The effect means (341, etc.) further includes a movable member (39) that can move between a standby position having a low covering ratio covering the display screen in the image display means (341) and an operating position having a high covering ratio. Prepare,
The gaming machine according to Appendix E1, wherein the visual inhibition effect is a movable member operating effect in which the movable member (39) is moved from the standby position to the operating position.

[Appendix E3]
In the visual impairment effect, an information notification image (831,851,861,871 or the like) that notifies predetermined information in a visible layer in a multilayer image in which a plurality of images are superimposed is the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to Appendix E1 or Appendix E2, which is the effect displayed in ().

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices E1 to E3, the specific selection-based image effect is executed before the visual impairment effect is executed, and the specific selection-based image effect is not executed after the visual impairment effect is executed. Therefore, the specific selection-based image effect can be used as a predictive effect that the visual impairment effect is executed. For example, the specific selection main image effect can be a sign effect that the movable member operation effect is executed or that the information notification image is displayed. Therefore, since the player can predict that the movable member operation effect will be executed and the information notification image will be displayed by executing the specific selection subject image effect, the player will be the specific selection subject. You can enjoy the special game while paying attention to whether the image production is executed.

[Appendix F1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, the determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to the special game state (big hit game state) in which the special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed, and
A main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game based on the determination result of the determination means (41), and
The special game and the special game, including an image display means (341) for displaying a specific selection subject image (selected character image 714) for a specific selection subject (selected character) selected by a player from a plurality of selection subjects (characters). In the notification game (variable game) that notifies the determination result, the effect means (341, etc.) in which the game effect (big hit game effect, variable game effect) is executed, and
The effect determining means (41) for determining the game effect to be executed by the effect means (341, etc.) and
An effect executing means (51) for causing the effect means (341, etc.) to execute the game effect, and
With
The game production is
As the game effect executed in the notification game, the notification game specific effect subject image effect (super reach effect, special reach) in which the specific effect subject (effect character) among the plurality of effect subjects (characters) is mainly displayed. Including production character production) such as production
As the game effect executed in the special game, a special game specific effect subject image effect (specific character effect) in which the specific effect subject is mainly displayed, and an effect executed by the image display means (341). The visual impairment effect that obstructs visual recognition and
When it is determined that the visual impairment effect is executed by the effect determining means (51) and the effect is shifted to the special gaming state, the effect executing means (51) triggers the transition to the special gaming state. When the trigger game image effect executed at a predetermined timing of the notified game is the notified game specific effect main image effect, the game machine is characterized in that the specific selection subject image effect is executed.

[Appendix F2]
The effect means (341, etc.) further includes a movable member (39) that can move between a standby position having a low covering ratio covering the display screen in the image display means (341) and an operating position having a high covering ratio. Prepare,
The gaming machine according to Appendix F1, wherein the visual inhibition effect is a movable member operating effect in which the movable member (39) is moved from the standby position to the operating position.

[Appendix F3]
In the visual impairment effect, an information notification image (831,851,861,871 or the like) that notifies predetermined information in a visible layer in a multilayer image in which a plurality of images are superimposed is the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to Appendix F1 or Appendix F2, which is the effect displayed in ().

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices F1 to F3, when the visual inhibition effect is scheduled to be executed, the special game specific effect main image effect is executed when the trigger game image effect is the notification game specific effect main image effect. Therefore, the specific selection-based image effect can be used as a predictive effect that the visual impairment effect is executed. For example, the specific selection main image effect can be a sign effect that the movable member operation effect is executed or that the information notification image is displayed. Therefore, since the player can predict that the movable member operation effect will be executed and the information notification image will be displayed by executing the specific selection subject image effect, the player will be the specific selection subject. You can enjoy the special game while paying attention to whether the image production is executed.

[Appendix G1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, the determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to the special game state (big hit game state) in which the special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed, and
A main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game based on the determination result of the determination means (41), and
The special game and the special game, including an image display means (341) for displaying a specific selection subject image (selected character image 714) for a specific selection subject (selected character) selected by a player from a plurality of selection subjects (characters). In the notification game (variable game) that notifies the determination result, the effect means (341, etc.) in which the game effect (big hit game effect, variable game effect) is executed, and
An effect executing means (51) for causing the effect means to execute the game effect, and
With
The special game includes an opening and a plurality of unit games (round games) that shift after the opening and give a game value (game ball) to the player.
The game effect is a specific selection subject image effect (specific character effect) executed by the image display means (341) with the selection subject as the main body and the image display means as the game effect executed in the special game. Including the visual impairment effect that hinders the visual recognition of the effect executed in (341).
The effect executing means (51) is the specific selection in both the opening and the predetermined specific unit game among the plurality of unit games before the execution of the visual impairment effect in the special game. A game machine characterized by performing a main image production.

[Appendix G2]
The effect means (341, etc.) further includes a movable member (39) that can move between a standby position having a low covering ratio covering the display screen in the image display means (341) and an operating position having a high covering ratio. Prepare,
The gaming machine according to Appendix G1, wherein the visual inhibition effect is a movable member operating effect in which the movable member (39) is moved from the standby position to the operating position.

[Appendix G3]
In the visual impairment effect, an information notification image (831,851,861,871 or the like) that notifies predetermined information in a visible layer in a multilayer image in which a plurality of images are superimposed is the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to Appendix G1 or Appendix G2, which is the effect displayed in ().

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices G1 to G3, the specific selection main image effect is executed a plurality of times before the visual inhibition effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to use it as a predictive effect that the specific selection-based image effect is executed a plurality of times. For example, it is possible to use the fact that the specific selection-based image effect is executed a plurality of times as a predictive effect that the visual impairment effect is executed. For example, the execution of the specific selection main image effect a plurality of times can be a sign effect that the movable member operation effect is executed or that the information notification image is displayed. Therefore, the player can specify that the movable member operation effect is executed and the information notification image is displayed by executing the specific selection subject image effect a plurality of times. You can enjoy the special game while paying attention to whether the selection-based image production is executed multiple times.

[Appendix H1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, the determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to the special game state (big hit game state) in which the special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed, and
A main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game based on the determination result of the determination means (41), and
The special game and the special game, including an image display means (341) for displaying a specific selection subject image (selected character image 714) for a specific selection subject (selected character) selected by a player from a plurality of selection subjects (characters). In the notification game (variable game) that notifies the determination result, the effect means (341, etc.) in which the game effect (big hit game effect, variable game effect) is executed, and
An effect executing means (51) for causing the effect means (341, etc.) to execute the game effect, and
With
The game effect is the specific selection subject image effect (specific character effect) executed by the image display means (341) with the specific selection subject as the main body, and the image display as the game effect executed in the special game. Including a visual impairment effect that hinders the visual recognition of the effect performed in the means (341).
When the visual impairment effect is executed in the special game, the effect executing means (51) sets the timing for executing the visual impairment effect, and then specifies the specific at a timing different from the timing for executing the visual impairment effect. A gaming machine characterized by having means for setting a selection-based image effect to be executed.

[Appendix H2]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games (round games) that give a player a game value (game ball).
The effect executing means (51) is
At the first timing set in the first period in which the unit game selected from the plurality of unit games is executed, the visual impairment effect is executed.
The gaming machine according to Appendix H1, wherein the specific selection subject image effect is executed at a second timing set in a second period other than the first period in the special game.

[Appendix H3]
The special game further includes an opening before executing a plurality of unit games.
The gaming machine according to Appendix H2, wherein the second period is a period other than the unit game in which the visual inhibition effect of the opening and the plurality of unit games is executed.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices H1 to H3, in the special game, the specific selection subject image effect for the specific selection subject selected by the player is performed at a timing different from the visual impairment effect, for example, a unit game in which the visual impairment effect is executed. It is executed in a unit game different from or in the opening. Therefore, the player can fully enjoy the specific selection-based image production in the special game without hindering the visibility of the specific selection-based image production by the visual recognition inhibition effect. Further, although the specific selection-based image effect is affected by the execution timing of the visual impairment effect, it is executed at various timings including the opening. Therefore, when it is desired to see the specific selection-based image effect, it is necessary to pay attention to the image display means from the start of the special game, so that the player can concentrate on the effect executed by the image display means. It will be possible. This makes it possible for the player to entertain the effect intended by the game machine in the special game. For example, to give an opportunity to see an image effect for a selection subject other than the specific selection subject selected by the player, and to give a motivation to newly select a selection subject other than the currently selected specific selection subject as the specific selection subject. Can be done.

[Appendix H4]
In the visual impairment effect, an information notification image (831,851,861,871 or the like) that notifies predetermined information in a visible layer in a multilayer image in which a plurality of images are superimposed is the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H1 to H3, characterized in that the effect is displayed in ().

[Appendix H5]
In the information notification image, the integrated value (cumulative number of balls) of the game value (game ball) given to the player during the execution period of one or more of the special games satisfying the predetermined conditions determines the predetermined game value. The gaming machine according to Appendix H4, which is an image (861) for notifying that the number has been exceeded.

[Appendix H6]
The notified game state is the first notified game state (low probability mode) and the second notification in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the determination means (41) is higher than that of the first notified game state. Including the game state (high probability mode),
The special gaming state shifts to the first special gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state) that shifts to the first notification gaming state after the end of the special game, and to the second notification gaming state after the end of the special game. Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state, 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state)
The gaming machine according to Appendix H4 or Appendix H5, wherein the information notification image is an image (831) suggesting or clearly indicating that the special gaming state is the second special gaming state.

[Appendix H7]
A holding means (41) that holds the right to proceed with the notification game by the main control means (41) up to a predetermined upper limit, and
A hold result storage means (412) for storing the determination result for the hold notification game held by the hold means (41), and a hold result storage means (412).
With more
The information notification image includes a determination result for the hold notification game stored in the hold notification storage means (412) that shifts to the special game state after the execution of the hold notification game. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H4 to H6, which is an image (851) suggesting or clearly indicating that.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices H4 to H7, it is possible to prevent the specific selection main image effect from being disturbed by various information broadcasting images that are the visual impairment effect.

[Appendix H8]
The effect means (341, etc.) further includes a movable member (39) that can move between a standby position having a low covering ratio covering the display screen in the image display means (341) and an operating position having a high covering ratio. Prepare,
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H1 to H7, wherein the visual impairment effect is a movable member operation effect in which the movable member (39) is moved from the standby position to the operating position.

[Appendix H9]
The notified game state is the first notified game state (low probability mode) and the second notification in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the determination means (41) is higher than that of the first notified game state. Including the game state (high probability mode),
The special gaming state shifts to the first special gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state) that shifts to the first notification gaming state after the end of the special game, and to the second notification gaming state after the end of the special game. Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state, 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state)
The gaming machine according to Appendix H8, wherein the movable member operating effect is an effect that suggests or clearly indicates that the special gaming state is the second special gaming state.

[Appendix H10]
A holding means (41) that holds the right to proceed with the notification game by the main control means (41) up to a predetermined upper limit, and
A hold result storage means (412) for storing the determination result for the hold notification game held by the hold means (41), and a hold result storage means (412).
With more
The movable member operation effect includes, among the determination results for the hold notification game stored in the hold result storage means (412), one that shifts to the special game state after the execution of the hold notification game. The gaming machine according to Appendix H8 or Appendix H9, which is an effect suggesting or clearly indicating that the player is present.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices H8 to H10, it is possible to prevent the specific selection-based image production from being hindered by various effects such as the movable member operation effect, the promotion effect, and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect, which are the visual impairment effects. it can.

10: Game machine 20: Operation button 20a: Operation switch 21: Selection decision unit 21A: Selection button 211: Up selection button 212: Down selection button 213: Left selection button 214: Right selection buttons 211a to 211d: Selection operation switch 21B: Decision button 21Ba: Decision operation switch 26: Speaker 316: Variable winning opening 331: Main control unit 332: Sub control unit 341: Symbol display unit 39: Movable accessory member 4: Main control device 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
5: Voice lamp control device 51: MPU
511: ROM
512: RAM
6: Display control device 61: MPU
611: ROM
612: RAM
714: Selected character 74: Character selection screen 714-747: Character selection image 81: Round game production screen 811: Round display image 812: Big hit round number display image 813: Character introduction image 82: Button operation request screen 821: Operation button image 83: Promotion success production screen 84: Promotion failure production screen 85: Hold consecutive villa confirmation display screen 86: Specific number of balls display image display screen 87: Error occurrence image display screen

Claims (1)

A determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition,
A main control means that controls the progress of the game based on the determination result of the determination means,
When the player performs a predetermined operation on a predetermined operation means, the main effect display means for determining and displaying the specific select subject effect from a plurality of select subject effects, and
An effect means for executing a game effect in the special game and the notification game for notifying the determination result, and
An effect executing means for causing the effect means to execute the game effect, and
With
The game effect is displayed as an image game effect executed in the special game using a subject corresponding to the specific selection subject effect, and a specific subject image effect whose display timing is set at the start of the special game. Includes a visual impairment image effect that hinders the visibility of the predetermined game image effect by being displayed on the front side of the predetermined game image effect displayed in the special game.
The visual inhibition image effect is displayed when a predetermined condition different from the determination result of the determination means for the special game is satisfied during the execution of the special game, and the display timing is set at the start of the special game. It is an image production that is not done,
In a predetermined special gaming state, the visual impairment image effect is set so that the specific subject image effect and the visual impairment image effect are displayed at different timings without overlapping.
The plurality of subject effect display means are such that when a player performs the predetermined operation on the predetermined operation means when a specific condition is satisfied after the end of the predetermined notification game for notifying the determination result. The specific selection subject production is determined and displayed from the selection subject production of
Wherein the predetermined condition is that reaches a predetermined specific number defined number ball out previously,
The visual impairment image effect is a specific number of ball output display image effect that notifies the player that the number of balls has reached the predetermined specific number.
The special game includes a game value-imparting game that imparts game value to the player, and an opening that is executed during the period from the start of the special game to the start of the game value-imparting game.
When the display timing of the specific subject image effect is set to the opening, the visual impairment image effect is displayed in the game value-imparting game.
When the display timing of the specific subject image effect is set to the game value-imparting game and the predetermined condition is satisfied in the special game, the specific number of payout display image effect as the visual impairment image effect is specified. A gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed after the main image production is completed.